Pioneer GPS Receiver AVIC F90BT User Manual
Operation Manual  
FLASH MEMORY MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION  
RECEIVER  
AVIC-F90BT  
Notice to all users:  
Be sure to read “Important Information for the user” first!  
“Important Information for the user” includes the  
important information that you must understand before  
using this navigation system.  
This software requires that the navigation system is  
properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and  
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may  
be required. For more information, please contact your  
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at  
(800) 421-1404.  
English  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Searching for a location by scrolling the  
map 35  
– Subscribing to the MSN Direct  
service 47  
– Activating the MSN Direct  
function 47  
Browsing gas prices 47  
Browsing movie times 48  
– Searching for a theater by selecting a  
movie title 48  
– Searching for a movie title by selecting  
a theater 49  
Browsing weather information 50  
– Checking the local weather  
information 50  
– Checking worldwide weather  
conditions 50  
Using traffic information 50  
– Viewing the traffic list 50  
– How to read traffic information on the  
map 51  
After the location is decided (Map  
Confirmation Screen)  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” 36  
Route... 36  
Save as... 37  
Setting the location as a new destination 37  
Setting the location as a waypoint 37  
Replacing the location as the new final  
destination 37  
Setting the location as the start point 37  
Viewing the information of a specified  
location 38  
Placing a map pin on the location 38  
– Removing a map pin 39  
Registering the location as a customized  
POI 39  
Storing the location in “Favorites” 40  
Deleting an entry in “Favorites” 40  
– Setting the traffic information 51  
Using hands-free phoning  
Hands-free phoning overview 52  
Preparing communication devices 52  
Displaying the Phone Menu 52  
Registering your cellular phone 52  
– Searching for nearby phones 53  
– Searching for a specified phone 53  
– Pairing from your mobile phone 54  
Connecting a registered cellular phone 55  
– Disconnecting a cellular phone 55  
– Deleting a registered phone 55  
Receiving a phone call 56  
Checking the current route  
Checking the current route conditions 41  
– Playing simulated travel at high  
speed 42  
– Checking the entire route overview on  
the map 42  
Checking the current itinerary 42  
Editing waypoints and the destination  
Editing waypoints 44  
– Adding a waypoint 44  
– Sorting waypoints 44  
– Deleting a waypoint 44  
Storing the current route 44  
– Deleting the entry in “Saved  
Routes” 45  
– Answering an incoming call 56  
– Rejecting an incoming call 56  
Making a phone call 56  
– Direct dialing 57  
– Dialing from the history 57  
– Calling a number in the “Contacts”  
screen 58  
Deleting the current route 45  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Activating the service 46  
– Dialing a phone number on the “Map  
Confirmation Screen” 58  
– Checking your product key 46  
– Making a call home easily 58  
3
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
– Dialing GOOG-411 59  
– Slow motion playback 73  
Announcing incoming short mails 59  
Transferring the phone book 59  
Clearing memory 60  
Using the “Function” menu 73  
Playing a DVD-VR  
Reading the screen 75  
Using the touch panel keys 75  
– Searching for a desired scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 76  
Setting the phone 60  
– Setting the phone volume 60  
– Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission 61  
– Answering a call automatically 61  
– Setting the automatic rejection  
function 61  
– Switching the playback mode 77  
– Using the short-time skip function 77  
– Playing by selecting from the title  
list 77  
– Echo canceling and noise  
reduction 62  
– Frame-by-frame playback 77  
– Slow motion playback 77  
Using the “Function” menu 78  
– Setting the automatic connection 62  
– Editing the device name 62  
Notes for hands-free phoning 62  
Updating the Bluetooth wireless technology  
software 64  
Playing a DivX  
Reading the screen 79  
Using the touch panel keys 79  
– Frame-by-frame playback 80  
– Slow motion playback 80  
– Searching for a desired scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 80  
Playing the audio CD  
Reading the screen 65  
Using the touch panel keys 65  
Selecting a track from the list 66  
Using the “Function” menu 66  
Playing music files on ROM  
Reading the screen 67  
Using the touch panel keys 67  
– Selecting a track from the list 68  
– Browsing embedded text  
information 68  
Using the “Function” menu 81  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Displaying DVD Setup menu 82  
Setting the top-priority languages 82  
Setting assist subtitles on or off 82  
Setting the angle icon display 83  
Setting the aspect ratio 83  
Using the “Function” menu 69  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Setting the parental lock 83  
Reading the screen 70  
– Setting the code number and level 83  
Displaying your DivX® VOD registration  
code 84  
Setting “Auto Play” 84  
Setting the subtitle file for DivX® 85  
Language code chart for DVDs 86  
Using the touch panel keys 70  
– Resuming playback (Bookmark) 72  
– Searching for a desired scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 72  
– Direct number search 72  
– Operating the DVD menu 72  
– Frame-by-frame playback 73  
Playing the music file (USB, SD)  
Starting procedures 87  
Reading the screen 87  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Using the touch panel keys (Music) 88  
– Selecting a track from the list 89  
– Browsing embedded text  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 104  
Switching the display 104  
information 89  
Using the “Function” menu 89  
Using the “Function” menu 104  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 105  
Playing the movie file (USB, SD)  
Starting procedures 91  
Reading the screen 91  
Using the touch panel keys (Video) 91  
– Searching for a desired scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 92  
– Switching the seek mode 105  
– Tuning in strong signals 105  
– Switching the reception mode 105  
Using the radio (AM)  
Reading the screen 106  
Using the touch panel keys 106  
– Switching between the detailed  
information display and the preset list  
display 106  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 107  
Using the “Function” menu 107  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 107  
Using the “Function” menu 92  
Using the iPod® (iPod)  
Starting procedures 94  
Reading the screen 94  
Using the touch panel keys (Music) 95  
– Browsing for a song 95  
Starting the video playback 96  
Using the touch panel keys (Video) 97  
– Browsing for a video 97  
Using the “Function” menu 98  
– Tuning in strong signals 107  
Using the XM tuner  
Reading the screen 109  
Using the radio (FM)  
Reading the screen 100  
Using the touch panel keys 100  
– Switching between the detailed  
information display and the preset list  
display 101  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 101  
Using the “Function” menu 101  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 101  
Using the touch panel keys 109  
– Selecting an XM channel directly 110  
– Displaying the Radio ID 110  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations 111  
– Selecting a channel from the list 111  
– Using “My Mix” function 111  
– Using the direct traffic announcement  
function 112  
Using the “Function” menu 112  
– Setting the memorized songs 113  
– Tuning in strong signals 102  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
Reading the screen 114  
Using the touch panel keys 114  
– Selecting a SIRIUS channel  
directly 115  
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)  
Reading the screen 103  
Using the touch panel keys 103  
– Switching between the detailed  
information display and the preset list  
display 104  
– Display the Radio ID 115  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations 116  
– Setting the POI appearance 130  
– Creating new categories 131  
– Editing your customized POI 132  
– Recording your travel history 132  
– Setting your home position 134  
The options on the “System Settings”  
menu. 134  
– Using “My Mix” function 116  
– Using the direct traffic announcement  
function 116  
– Using the “Instant Replay”  
function 117  
Using the “Function” menu 117  
– Setting the memorized songs 118  
– Using the Game Alert function 118  
– Displaying Game Information 119  
– Displaying the “System Settings”  
menu 134  
– Selecting the language 135  
– Changing the splash screen 135  
– Setting the rear view camera 136  
– Adjusting the response positions of the  
touch panels (touch panel  
Using the AV input  
Using the AV1 120  
Using the AV2 120  
Using the touch panel keys 120  
calibration) 137  
– Adjusting the screen brightness 137  
– Setting the illumination color 137  
– Checking the version information 138  
– Turning off the screen 138  
The “AV Sound” menu options 139  
– Displaying the “AV Sound” menu 139  
– Using balance adjustment 139  
– Using the equalizer 139  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
Reading the screen 121  
Using the touch panel keys 121  
Customizing preferences  
The options in the “Navi Settings”  
menu 123  
– Basic operations in the “Navi Settings”  
menu 123  
– GPS & Time Settings 123  
– Time Settings 124  
– 3D Settings 125  
– Map Settings 125  
– Displayed Info 126  
– Smart Zoom 126  
– Overview Mode 127  
– Manage POI 127  
– Manage Track Logs 127  
– Route 127  
– Adjusting loudness 141  
– Using subwoofer output 141  
– Using the high pass filter 142  
– Adjusting source levels 142  
– Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) 142  
The options on the “AV Settings” menu 142  
– Displaying the “AV Settings”  
menu 142  
– Setting video input 1 (AV1) 143  
– Setting video input 2 (AV2) 143  
– Switching the auto antenna  
setting 143  
– Changing the wide screen mode 143  
– Switching the sound muting/  
attenuation 144  
– Warnings 128  
– Regional Settings 129  
– Restore Factory Settings 129  
– Set Home 129  
– Setting the rear output 144  
– Acquiring iPod music  
– Demo Mode 129  
– Sound settings 130  
– About 130  
information 144  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Operating Your Navigation System with  
Voice  
Handling and care of the disc 168  
– Built-in drive and care 168  
– Ambient conditions for playing a  
disc 168  
To Ensure Safe Driving 146  
Basics of Voice Operation 146  
– Flow of voice operation 146  
– Starting voice operation 147  
Operating iPod by voice 147  
Calling the entry on “Contacts” 147  
Available Basic Voice Commands 148  
– Basic commands 148  
Playable discs 169  
– About DVD-Video and CD 169  
– About AVCHD recorded discs 169  
– About playing DualDisc 169  
– About Dolby Digital 169  
– About DTS sound 169  
Detailed information for playable media 169  
– Compatibility 169  
– Media compatibility chart 172  
About Bluetooth 176  
About the SAT RADIO READY Logo 176  
About HD Radio 176  
– Voice operation for the iPod 148  
– Voice operation for AV source (other  
than iPod) 149  
– Voice commands related to hands-free  
phoning 150  
Tips for Voice Operation 151  
About SD and SDHC logo 177  
About WMA 177  
About DivX 177  
About AAC 177  
Detailed information regarding connectable  
iPods 177  
Using the LCD screen correctly 178  
– Handling the LCD screen 178  
– Liquid crystal display (LCD)  
screen 178  
Other functions  
Setting the anti-theft function 152  
– Setting the password 152  
– Entering the password 152  
– Deleting the password 152  
– Forgotten passwords 152  
Returning the navigation system to the  
default or factory settings 153  
– Setting items to be deleted 154  
– Maintaining the LCD screen 178  
– Small fluorescent tube 178  
Display information 179  
– Destination Menu 179  
– Phone Menu 179  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting 155  
Messages and how to react to them 159  
Messages for Audio Functions 160  
Positioning technology 163  
– Positioning by GPS 163  
– Positioning by “Dead Reckoning” 163  
– How do GPS and “Dead Reckoning”  
work together? 163  
Handling large errors 164  
– When positioning by GPS is  
impossible 164  
– Settings Menu 180  
– Shortcut menu 182  
– DVD Setup 183  
Glossary 184  
Specifications 187  
– Conditions likely to cause noticeable  
positioning errors 165  
Route setting information 166  
– Route search specifications 166  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
Terminology  
Manual overview  
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read  
the following information about the conven-  
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with  
these conventions will help you greatly as you  
learn how to use your new equipment.  
Before using this product, be sure to read “Im-  
portant Information for the user” (a separate  
manual) which contains warnings, cautions,  
and other important information that you  
should note.  
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-  
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:  
e.g.)  
This manual provides important information  
you need to make full use of your new naviga-  
tion system.  
The beginning chapters outline this navigation  
system. The later chapters describe the details  
of the navigation functions.  
MENU button, MAP button.  
Items in different menus, screen titles, and  
functional components are described in  
bold with double quotation marks “ ”:  
e.g.)  
!
“Destination Menu” screen or “AV  
Source” screen  
Chapter 8 describes the operations related to  
hands-free phoning by using a cellular phone  
!
!
Touch panel keys that are available on the  
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:  
e.g.)  
[Destination], [Settings].  
Extra information, alternatives and other  
notes are presented in the following for-  
mat:  
®
featuring Bluetooth technology.  
Chapter 9 to Chapter 23 describe how to con-  
trol the AV sources. Please read these chap-  
ters when you use the various functions in the  
built-in audio and visual source or operate the  
audio equipment connected to the navigation  
system.  
Chapter 25 describes how to change the set-  
tings so as to suit your tastes. The behavior of  
your navigation system depends the settings  
for navigation and audio-visual functions.  
e.g.)  
p If the home location has not been stored  
yet, set the location first.  
!
References are indicated like this:  
e.g.)  
= For details, refer to Setting your home  
position on page 134.  
How to read this manual  
Finding the operation procedure from  
what you want to do  
When you have decided what you want to do,  
you can find the page you need from the  
“Contents”.  
About the definition of  
terminology  
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”  
In this manual, the screen that is attached to  
the body of this navigation unit will be referred  
to as the “Front Display”. Any additional op-  
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-  
junction with this navigation unit will be  
referred to as the “Rear Display”.  
Finding the operation procedure from  
a menu name  
If you want to check the meaning of each item  
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-  
cessary page from the “Display information” at  
the end of the manual.  
Glossary  
See the glossary to find the meaning of a  
term.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
“Video image”  
3D map screen  
“Video image” in this manual indicates the  
moving images of DVD-Video, DivX, iPod, and  
any equipment that is connected to this sys-  
tem with an RCA cable, such as general-pur-  
pose AV equipment.  
“External storage device (USB, SD)”  
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card,  
USB memory device and USB portable audio  
player are collectively referred to as the “exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates  
the USB memory and USB portable audio  
player only, they are referred to as the “USB  
storage device”.  
A wide variety of Points of Interest  
(POI) information  
More than 100 types of POI categories are in-  
cluded in the database. You can also create  
your own customized POIs and categories.  
Auto reroute function  
If you deviate from the set route, the system  
will re-calculate the route from that point so  
that you remain on track to the destination.  
p This function may not work under certain  
conditions.  
Features  
Touch panel key operation  
It is possible to operate the navigation and  
audio functions by using the touch panel key.  
2D and 3D map view modes  
Various types of screen displays can be se-  
lected for navigation guidance.  
Assign your original image as a splash  
screen  
You can store your own pictures on an external  
storage device (USB, SD) in JPEG or BMP for-  
mat and import an original splash screen to  
this navigation system. These imported  
images can be set up as customized splash  
screens.  
2D map screen  
p Imported original images will be stored in  
the built-in memory, but the ability to save  
these images cannot be guaranteed com-  
pletely. If your original image data is de-  
leted, set the external storage device (USB,  
SD) again and re-import the original image.  
A wide variety of playable file formats  
!
Built-in DVD drive (AVIC-F900BTand  
AVIC-F90BT)  
DVD-Video (commercial-release DVD-  
Video), DVD-R/-RW/-R DL (DVD-Video,  
DVD-VR, Data<MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX>),  
CD (commercial-release audio CD), CD-R/-  
RW (CD-DA, Data<MP3, WMA, AAC,  
DivX>)  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
!
!
Built-in CD drive (AVIC-F700BTand  
AVIC-F7010BT)  
CD (commercial-release audio CD), CD-R/-  
RW (CD-DA, Data<MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX,  
WAV>)  
External storage device (USB, SD)  
Following file types is playable on the exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD).  
allow playback simply by selecting an item  
from the list.  
iPod® compatibility  
This product supports only the following iPod  
models and iPod software versions. Others  
may not be work correctly.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
iPod nano first generation; Ver. 1.3.1  
iPod nano second generation; Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano third generation; Ver. 1.1  
iPod fifth generation; Ver. 1.3  
iPod classic; Ver. 1.1.1  
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, MPEG-4, AVI  
— Notice regarding video viewing  
Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the author’s  
rights as protected by the Copyright Law.  
— Notice regarding DVD-Video viewing  
This product incorporates copyright protec-  
tion technology that is protected by method  
claims of certain U.S. patents and other in-  
tellectual property rights owned by  
iPod touch; Ver. 1.1.4  
p When you use this navigation system with  
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-  
IU230V) (sold separately), you can control  
an iPod compatible with this navigation  
system.  
p To obtain maximum performance, we re-  
commend that you use the latest software  
for the iPod.  
p Operations may vary depending on the  
iPod models and the software version of  
iPod.  
p For more details about iPod compatibility  
with this navigation system, refer to the in-  
formation on our website.  
p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Macrovision Corporation and other rights  
owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses  
only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engi-  
neering or disassembly is prohibited.  
— Notice regarding MP3 file usage  
Supply of this navigation system conveys  
only a license for private, non-commercial  
use and does not convey a license nor  
imply any right to use this product in any  
commercial (i.e. revenue-generating), real  
time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite,  
cable and/or any other media), broadcast-  
ing/streaming via internet, intranets and/or  
other networks or in other electronic con-  
tent distribution systems, such as pay-  
audio or audio-on-demand applications. An  
independent license for such use is re-  
quired. For details, please visit  
Hands-free phoning  
A cellular phone featuring Bluetooth® technol-  
ogy can be connected wirelessly.  
— The cellular phone used must be compati-  
ble with the profile of this navigation sys-  
tem.  
— When using Bluetooth wireless technology,  
this navigation system may not be able to  
operate all of the functions on the cellular  
phone.  
Rear display entertainment  
Video sources can be displayed on the rear  
display.  
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
Auto file name listing  
The track name will be automatically listed  
when this function is available. This system  
provides easy-to-operate audio functions that  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
— “Video image” that is output from the built-  
in DVD drive (DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX) and  
AV input (AV1, AV2) can be displayed on  
the rear display.  
first time, the adjustment of the black density  
for clear viewing is recommended.  
— This function is available for AVIC-F900BT  
and AVIC-F90BT.  
Notes for internal memory  
Before removing the vehicle  
battery  
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,  
the memory will be erased and must be repro-  
grammed.  
Rear view camera ready  
You can display what is behind the vehicle if  
connected to a rear view camera (e.g. ND-  
BC2) (sold separately).  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
vigation system to the default or factory set-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items to be deleted, refer to Returning  
the navigation system to the default or  
factory settings on page 153.  
Map coverage  
For more details about the map coverage of  
this navigation system, refer to the information  
on our website.  
Protecting the LCD panel  
and screen  
About the data being deleted  
The information is erased by pressing RESET  
button or disconnecting the yellow lead from  
the battery (or removing the battery itself).  
However, some items remain.  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
vigation system to the default or factory set-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items to be deleted, refer to Returning  
the navigation system to the default or  
factory settings on page 153.  
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the  
LCD screen when this product is not being  
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight  
can result in LCD screen malfunction due  
to the resulting high temperatures.  
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,  
etc.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger. (The stylus is supplied for spe-  
cial calibrations. Do not use the stylus for  
normal operations.)  
Resetting the microprocessor  
CAUTION  
Pressing RESET button clears the settings for the  
AV source without clearing all the navigation  
function items. Please refer to the related section  
before clearing.  
Viewing the LCD comfortably  
= For more detailed information about the items  
to be deleted, refer to Returning the navigation  
system to the default or factory settings on  
page 153.  
Due to its construction, the viewing angle of  
the LCD screen is limited. However, “Bright-  
ness” may be used to adjust the black density  
of the video. When using the screen for the  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
The microprocessor must be reset under the  
following conditions:  
!
Prior to using this product for the first time  
after installation.  
!
!
If the product fails to operate properly.  
If there appear to be problems with the op-  
eration of the system.  
!
!
When changing the combination of the  
equipment.  
When adding/removing additional pro-  
ducts that connect to the navigation sys-  
tem.  
!
If your vehicle position shown on the map  
with a significant positioning error.  
1
2
Turn the ignition switch OFF.  
Press RESET button with a pen tip or  
other pointed instrument.  
RESET button  
p If you have connected other equipment to  
this navigation system with IP-BUS, be sure  
to reset that equipment too.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
4 3  
2
1
5
6
7
8
9
a
Checking part names and functions  
This chapter gives information about the  
names of the parts and the main features  
using the buttons.  
Press and hold to display the “Screen Cali-  
bration” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Adjusting the response positions of the  
touch panels (touch panel calibration) on  
page 137.  
1 Disc loading slot  
Insert a disc to play.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Inserting/ejecting a disc on the next  
page.  
6 MAP button  
Press to view the map screen.  
Press and hold to display the “Picture Ad-  
justment” screen.  
2 LCD screen  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Adjusting the screen brightness on  
page 137.  
3 EJECT button  
4 RESET button  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Resetting the microprocessor on page  
11.  
7 MULTI-CONTROL  
Rotating;  
Adjusts the AV (Audio and Video) source vo-  
lume.  
Moving upward or downward once;  
Changes the map scale one step at a time.  
5 MENU button  
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
Menu”.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Keep moving upward or downward;  
Changes the map scale continuously.  
p This operation is available only while the  
map screen is displayed.  
Moving MULTI-CONTROL to the left or  
right;  
Inserting/ejecting a disc  
Inserting a disc  
%
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.  
Allows you to change the frequency one  
step at a time; operates track search con-  
trols.  
Keep moving MULTI-CONTROL to the  
left or right;  
Allows you to perform manual seek tuning,  
fast forward or reverse.  
Pressing the center of MULTI-CONTROL;  
Enables you to start the voice operation  
when “English” is selected in “Program lan-  
guage:”. (When a language other than  
“English” is selected, pressing the center al-  
lows you to hear the previous route gui-  
dance.)  
p When your phone is paired to the naviga-  
tion system, pressing its center allows  
you to answer an incoming call or end  
the phone call.  
p The built-in drive plays one standard 12-cm  
or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use  
an adapter when playing 8-cm discs.  
p Do not insert anything other than a disc  
into the disc loading slot.  
Ejecting a disc  
Keep pressing the center of MULTI-CON-  
TROL;  
%
Press EJECT button.  
The disc is ejected.  
Mutes the AV (Audio and Video) source. To  
cancel the muting, press and hold it again.  
Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card  
8 Bluetooth connection status indicator  
Lights up when your phone is paired to the  
navigation system by Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
CAUTION  
!
!
!
Keep the dummy SD card out of the reach of  
small children to prevent them from acciden-  
tally swallowing it.  
9 “AV2” input jack  
This is the “AV2” input terminal. Use the  
CD-RM10 (sold separately) to connect the  
external video component.  
p To connect your iPod by using USB inter-  
face cable for iPod (CD-IU230V), use  
“AV1” input (RCA) on the backside.  
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
a SD card slot  
= For more detailed information, refer to In-  
serting and ejecting an SD memory card  
on this page.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
Inserting an SD memory card  
Plugging and unplugging a  
USB storage device  
%
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
CAUTION  
Insert it with the contact surface facing to the  
left and press the card until it clicks and com-  
pletely locks.  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Plugging in a USB storage device  
%
Plug a USB storage device into the USB  
p There is no compatibility for Multi Media  
Card (MMC).  
p Compatibility with all SD memory card is  
not guaranteed.  
connector.  
USB connector  
p Optimum performance of this unit may not  
be obtained depending on the SD memory  
card.  
p Do not insert anything other than SD mem-  
ory cards or dummy SD cards into the SD  
card slot.  
Ejecting an SD memory card  
USB storage device  
1
Press the SD memory card until it clicks.  
p Compatibility with all USB storage device is  
not guaranteed.  
The SD memory card is ejected.  
Optimum performance of this navigation  
system may not be obtained depending on  
the USB storage device that is connected.  
p Connection via USB hub is not available.  
Unplugging a USB storage device  
%
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
2
Pull out the SD memory card.  
p Insert the dummy SD card to keep the SD  
card slot free of dust when the SD memory  
card is not inserted.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Disconnecting your iPod  
Connecting and  
disconnecting iPod  
%
Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod  
after checking that no data is being ac-  
cessed.  
CAUTION  
!
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Flow from startup to  
termination  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the navigation splash  
screen comes on for a few seconds.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to use your fingers to touch the touch  
panel keys. (The stylus is supplied for spe-  
cial calibrations. Do not use the stylus for  
normal operations.)  
Connecting your iPod  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
p For connection, USB interface cable for  
iPod (CD-IU230V) (sold separately) is re-  
quired.  
2
Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-  
nate the system.  
The navigation system is also turned off.  
p USB interface cable for iPod is supplied  
with AVIC-F90BT.  
On first-time startup  
1
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
CAUTION  
The rear view camera function is not available for  
safety reasons until the navigation system boots  
up completely.  
To AV input on the back of the navigation system  
When you use the navigation system for the  
first time, select the language that you want to  
use.  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the navigation splash  
screen comes on for a few seconds.  
2
Touch the language that you want to  
use on the screen.  
USB connector  
USB interface cable for  
iPod  
p For more details about iPod compatibility  
with this navigation system, refer to the in-  
formation on our website.  
p Connection via USB hub is not available.  
2
Connect your iPod.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
3
Touch the language that you want to  
%
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
use for the voice guidance.  
After a short pause, the navigation splash  
screen comes on for a few seconds.  
p The screen shown will differ depending on  
the previous conditions.  
p If the navigation screen was shown pre-  
viously, the disclaimer appears.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
p If other screens were shown previously, the  
disclaimer screen will be skipped.  
p If the anti-theft function is activated, you  
must enter your password. After unlocking  
the navigation system, the “Top Menu” ap-  
pears. If you enter the navigation screen  
first, the disclaimer screen will appear.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
The navigation system will now restart.  
4
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking  
its details, and then touch [OK] if you  
agree to the conditions.  
The “Top Menu” appears.  
Regular startup  
CAUTION  
The rear view camera function is not available for  
safety reasons until the navigation system boots  
up completely.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
The “Top Menu” appears when you boot up the navigation system for the first time.  
Screen switching overview  
2
4
3
1
5
6
8
7
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
What you can do on each menu  
1 Top Menu  
2
Touch [System Settings] and then touch  
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
Menu”.  
This is the starting menu to access the desired  
screens and operate the various functions.  
2 Destination Menu  
[Back Camera].  
3
Touch [On] next to “Camera” to acti-  
vate the camera setting.  
4
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
You can search for your destination on this  
menu. You can also check or cancel your set  
route from this menu.  
Menu” and then touch [AV Source].  
5
Touch [RearView] on the “AV Source”  
p [MSN Direct] is available for AVIC-  
F900BT and AVIC-F90BT.  
menu.  
3 Contacts screen  
You can access the list of contacts to call up  
an entry.  
4 AV Source menu  
You can access the screen for selecting the  
audio and visual source to play.  
5 Phone Menu  
You can access the screen that is related to  
hands-free phoning to see call histories and  
change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless  
technology connection.  
6 Settings Menu  
You can access the screen to customize set-  
tings.  
7 Map screen  
Press MAP button to display the navigation  
map screen.  
8 AV operation screen  
When you play the AV source, this screen ap-  
pears regularly. Touching the icon on the top  
left corner displays the “AV Source” menu.  
p To return to the previous screen, touch  
.
Displaying the rear camera image  
[RearView] can be displayed the full-screen  
rear camera image. [RearView] is useful if  
you want to monitor an attached trailer, etc.  
= For details, refer to Setting the rear view  
camera on page 136.  
1
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
Menu”, and then touch [Settings].  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
How to use the map  
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-  
come familiar with how the information appears on the map.  
How to read the map screen  
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
h
g
f
9
a
e
d
c
b
p Information with the mark (*) appears only  
when the route is set.  
5 Compass  
The red arrow indicates north.  
p Depending on the conditions and settings,  
some items may not be displayed.  
1 Next direction of travel*  
6 Map mode selector  
= For details, refer to Switching the map  
between 2D and 3D on page 22.  
7 Shortcut to the “Map Confirmation  
Screen”  
When you approach a guidance point, this ap-  
pears green. Touching this item enables you  
to hear the previous guidance again.  
p For more information about the direc-  
tion symbol, refer to Supplemental infor-  
mation about directions on page 167.  
2 Distance to the guidance point*  
Shows the distance to the next guidance  
point.  
Touching this shortcut enables the screen to  
switch to the “Map Confirmation Screen” di-  
rectly with the current position or the cursor  
position centered.  
= For details, refer to What you can do with  
the “Map Confirmation Screen” on page  
36.  
3 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-  
dance point)*  
8 Stop key for the dummy run  
4 Current time  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
This key will be displayed while you activate  
the dummy run (“Fly over” or “Demo  
Mode”). Touching the key to cancel the  
dummy run.  
= For details, refer to Demo Mode on  
page 129.  
= For details, refer to Map Settings on  
page 125.  
p The estimated time of arrival is an ideal  
value that the navigation system com-  
putes internally as the route is calcu-  
lated. The estimated time of arrival  
should be read just as a reference value,  
and does not guarantee arrival at the  
time indicated.  
= For details, refer to Playing simulated tra-  
vel at high speed on page 42.  
9 Album artwork on iPod  
If you connect your iPod to this navigation sys-  
tem, the album artwork that is playing ap-  
pears.  
g Map scale  
The scale of the map is indicated by distance.  
h Second Maneuver Arrow*  
Shows the turning direction after next and the  
distance to there.  
a Shortcut to the AV operation screen  
The AV Source currently selected is shown.  
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-  
tion screen of the current source directly.  
b Extension tab for the AV information bar  
Touching this tab opens the AV information  
bar and enables you to briefly view the current  
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-  
tracts the bar.  
p This item is not shown when “Full  
Screen Cockpit” is set to “On”.  
= For details, refer to Map Settings on  
page 125.  
Meaning of guidance flags  
: Destination  
The checkered flag indicates your  
destination.  
c Current route*  
The route currently set is highlighted in bright  
color on the map. If a waypoint is set on the  
route, the route after the next waypoint is  
highlighted in other color.  
: Waypoint  
The yellow flags indicate your way-  
points.  
d Current position  
: Start point  
The light blue flag indicates your  
start point.  
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.  
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your  
orientation and the display moves automati-  
cally as you drive.  
p The apex of the triangular mark is the  
proper current position.  
When you drive on a multi-lane road  
Appears where multi-lane roads exist when  
you are driving on your route. The highlighted  
lane indicates the recommended lane.  
e Street name (or city name) that your vehi-  
cle is traveling along  
f Multi-Info window  
Shows the value on the items selected on  
“Displayed Info”. Touching this area allows  
you to display the “Route Information”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displayed Info on  
page 126.  
= For details, refer to Checking the current  
route conditions on page 41.  
p This item is not shown when “Full  
Screen Cockpit” is set to “On”.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
p This information is based on the map data-  
base. Thus, the information may be differ-  
ent from what actual condition exists. Use  
it as just a directional reference for your  
driving.  
Changing the scale of the map  
1
Press MAP button to display the navi-  
gation map screen.  
2
Move MULTI-CONTROL down or up to  
zoom in or out.  
Note regarding the route highlighted  
in purple  
Moving MULTI-CONTROL upward or down-  
ward once allows you to change the map  
scale one step at a time. Holding MULTI-CON-  
TROL while moving it up or down allows you  
to change the scale sequentially.  
p A route highlighted in purple on the map  
indicates that your route includes a road  
not matching your preference on the fol-  
lowing settings in “Route”; “Unpaved  
Roads”, “Highways”, “Ferries”, “U-turns”,  
“Permit Needed”, “Toll Roads”.  
For your safety, please review and obey all  
local traffic rules along the highlighted  
route.  
Switching the map between 2D  
and 3D  
2D map screen  
3D map screen  
p Zooming out will reduce the size of the icon  
and further zooming out will hide it. How-  
ever, the pin-shaped icon is not resized and  
keeps displayed.  
p Further zooming out hides the lines of traf-  
fic information.  
Scrolling the map to the  
position you want to see  
1
Press MAP button to display the navi-  
gation map screen.  
1
Press MAP button to display the navi-  
2
Touch or  
to switch the map  
gation map screen.  
mode.  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
3
Touch anywhere on the map briefly to  
2
3
Touch  
to switch the 2D map mode.  
show the tilt controls and rotation angle.  
Touch the map briefly.  
Briefly touching the position on the map that  
you want to see positions the cursor there.  
Controls for tilt and rotation angle  
4
Touch the controls to adjust the tilt and  
rotation angle.  
Cursor  
Positioning the cursor to the desired location  
results in a brief informational overview about  
the location being displayed at the bottom of  
screen, with street name and other informa-  
tion for this location being shown. (The infor-  
mation shown varies depending on the  
position.)  
The basic flow of creating  
your route  
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and apply  
the parking brake.  
j
4
Touch and drag the map in the desired  
2 Display the “Destination Menu”.  
direction to scroll.  
Dragging the map scrolls it. The scrolling in-  
crement depends on your dragging length.  
p Pressing MAP button returns the map to  
the current position.  
j
3 Select the method of searching for your  
destination.  
j
4 Enter the information for the destination  
and narrow down candidates to one.  
Changing the tilt and rotation  
angle of the map  
On the 3D map screen, briefly touching the  
map shows the tilt controls and rotation angle.  
j
5 Touch [Go Here Now] on the “Map Confir-  
mation Screen”.  
1
Press MAP button to display the navi-  
gation map screen.  
j
6 The navigation system calculates the route  
to your destination, and then shows the  
route on the map.  
2
Touch to switch the 3D map mode.  
j
7 After releasing the parking brake, drive in  
accordance with navigation guidance.  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Displays the characters that are entered. If  
there is no text in the box, an informative  
guide with text appears.  
The operations of a list  
screen (e.g. city list)  
2 Screen title  
2
3
1
This description will provide you with a refer-  
ence for the next operation.  
3 Keyboard:  
Touching the keys enables you to enter the  
characters.  
4 Number of possible choices  
5
:
Returns the previous screen.  
:
6
Deletes the input text one letter at a time, be-  
ginning at the end of the text. Continuing to  
touch the button deletes all of the text.  
4
5
1 Screen title  
This description will provide you with a refer-  
ence for the next operation.  
2 Current page/total pages  
7 Caps lock control  
Switches the keyboard between lowercase let-  
ters and uppercase letters.  
3
:
Each touch of [aA] changes the settings as  
follows:  
— enables you to capitalize the first  
letter of a word.  
— enables you to enter letters in  
lower-case. (When a space is entered, it  
Returns the previous screen.  
:
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls  
through the list and allows you to view the re-  
maining items.  
4
5 Listed items:  
switches  
automatically.)  
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-  
row down the options and proceed to the next  
operation.  
— enables you to enter letters with  
capitals (caps) lock.  
8 [@/!]:  
Displays the key to enter special characters,  
such as [!].  
p The appearance of this key and typeable  
characters change according to the cur-  
rent keyboard layout.  
The operation of the on-  
screen keyboard  
1
2
3
4
5
6
9 [Keys]:  
Switches the on-screen keyboard layout.  
a [Done]:  
Confirms the entry and allows you to proceeds  
to the next step.  
7
8
9
a
1 Text box:  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
2
Touch [Address].  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions  
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake before  
setting your route.  
p Some information regarding traffic regula-  
tions depends on the time when the route  
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-  
mation may not correspond with a certain  
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually  
passes through the location in question.  
Also, the information on the traffic regula-  
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-  
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery  
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic  
regulations when driving.  
3
Touch the key next to “Country:” to dis-  
play the country list.  
Searching for a location by  
address  
The most frequently used function is [Ad-  
dress], in which the address is specified and  
the destination is searched.  
4
Touch one of the items on the list to set  
the country as search area.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”.  
The screen returns to the previous screen.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
5
Touch the key next to “State:” and  
8
Touch the desired city name.  
touch the desired state, province, or terri-  
tory on the list.  
!
When a city is already set, touching [City  
Center] allows you to select the representa-  
tive location of the city and proceed to the  
“Map Confirmation Screen”.  
The screen returns to the previous screen.  
6
Touch the key next to “City:” to enter  
the city name.  
9
Enter the street name and touch the de-  
sired one from the list.  
!
When a street is already set, touching  
[Street Center] allows you to select the re-  
presentative point of the street and proceed  
to the “Map Confirmation Screen”.  
!
When a street is already set, touching [In-  
tersection] allows you to search for an in-  
tersection. After entering the second street  
name and selecting the desired intersec-  
tion, the “Map Confirmation Screen” ap-  
pears. This is useful when you don’t know  
the house number or cannot input the  
house number of the selected street.  
7
Enter the city name or Zip code.  
10 Enter the house number and then  
touch [Done].  
!
If the house number you have entered is  
not found, a message appears. In that case,  
touch [OK] and try entering the existing  
house number.  
!
!
When the options are narrowed down to six  
or less, those are automatically listed.  
If you want to list the options matching to  
the current information entered, touch  
[Done].  
!
Touching [History] displays the list of cities  
that you selected before.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
11 Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
2
Touch [Around Cursor].  
3
Drag the map to move the cursor to the  
desired position and touch [OK].  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
If only one option is appropriate for your entry,  
the screen will jump to the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” directly and the process of entering the  
street name or house number will be skipped. If  
The number of nearby POIs will appear at the  
bottom of the screen.  
4
Touch your desired category.  
this is an undesirable location, touch  
with another address.  
to retry  
Searching for the vicinity  
Points of Interest (POI)  
Information about various facilities (Points Of  
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, parkings  
or restaurants, is available. By selecting the  
category (or entering the POI Name), you can  
search for a POI.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
Searching for POIs around the  
cursor  
Touch [Search] to search for a POI by entering  
the POI name in the selected category.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [POI].  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
5
Touch your desired POI.  
Searching for a nearby POI  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [POI].  
2
Touch [Around Current GPS Location].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to  
Searching for POIs around the cursor on the  
previous page.  
!
!
Touching [Name] tab sorts the options in  
the list in alphabetical order.  
Touching [Distance] tab sorts the options in  
the list in order by distance.  
Searching for POIs along the  
current route  
p This function is available when the route is  
set.  
p Icons are helpful for quickly telling the cate-  
gory of facilities with the same name.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [POI].  
6
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
2
Touch [Along Route].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to  
Searching for POIs around the cursor on the  
previous page.  
Searching for POIs around the  
destination  
p This function is available when the route is  
set.  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [POI].  
2
Touch [Around Destination].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to  
Searching for POIs around the cursor on the  
previous page.  
p Searching for a spot and touching [Info] on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen” also allows  
you to search for nearby POIs around the  
cursor.  
= For details, refer to Viewing the information  
of a specified location on page 38.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
4
Touch the search method that you  
Using “Saved Criteria”  
want to put it into memory.  
Memorizing your selection sequence  
You can store the selected search method and  
one of the categories as the shortcut to recall  
it later. It allows you to search for a POI in the  
same way as you did before. You can also de-  
lete the shortcuts.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [POI].  
2 Touch [Register Search Criteria].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
5
Touch the category that you want to  
put it into memory.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, select the desired category  
from the list repeatedly until your desired cate-  
gory appears.  
3
Touch one of the items on the list.  
Your selection sequence is shown on the top  
of the screen.  
6
Recheck the sequence and touch [Save  
Criteria] to put it into memory.  
!
Selecting an item that has already been  
stored allows you to overwrite it.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
!
Touching [Save Criteria] without selecting  
a category allows you to store only your se-  
lected search method including all cate-  
gories.  
4
Touch the desired POI.  
!
If there aren’t anymore detailed categories,  
a blank list appears. In such case, touching  
[Save Criteria] allows you to store it as the  
currently selected category. To know the  
states of the current sequence, refer to the  
top of the screen.  
7
Enter the desired name and then touch  
5
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
[Done] to complete the entry.  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
The storing process has completed and the  
shortcut is available on “Saved Criteria”.  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
Searching for POIs by using the  
memorized sequence  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
You can search for POIs with using the pre-  
stored shortcut.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [POI].  
Deleting the memorized POI shortcuts  
2
3
Touch [Saved Criteria].  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
Touch one of the items on the list.  
and then touch [POI].  
2
Touch [Saved Criteria].  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
3
Touch [Delete] on the right of the item  
4
Touch the folder that includes the de-  
that you want to delete.  
sired item on the list.  
5
Touch one of the items on the list.  
Searching for POIs by using  
the data on external  
storage devices (USB, SD)  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility programme “AVIC FEEDS”  
which is available separately, on your PC.  
(“AVIC FEEDS” will be available on our web-  
site.) Storing the customized POI properly and  
connecting the external storage device (USB,  
SD) enables the system to use the data for  
searches.  
6
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
1
Connect the USB device or insert the SD  
card.  
2
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [USB/SD].  
3
Touch the desired storage that you  
want to load.  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
4
Touch  
to delete the current value  
Searching for a location by  
coordinates  
and enter the desired coordinate.  
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints  
the location.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
!
Touching [N/S] or [E/W] changes the hemi-  
sphere.  
5
Touch [Done].  
The screen returns to the previous screen.  
Touch the other key that you have not entered  
yet, enter the latitude or longitude and then  
touch [Done] to finish the entry.  
2
Touch [Coordinate].  
6
Touch [OK].  
3
Touch either the latitude key or the  
longitude key, whichever you want to  
enter.  
The “Map Confirmation Screen” appears.  
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
7
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
The values on the latitude key or longitude key  
shows the coordinates on the cursor just be-  
fore entering this screen.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
3
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
Selecting a location you  
searched for recently  
The places that you have searched for in the  
past are automatically stored in “History”.  
Selecting the item on the list provides an easy  
way to specify the position.  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
p “History” can store up to 32 locations. If  
the entries reach the maximum, the new  
entry overwrites the oldest one.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [History].  
Deleting an entry in “History”  
Items in “History” can be deleted. All entries  
2
Touch the desired entry.  
in “History” can also be deleted at once.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [History].  
2
Touch [Delete] on the right of the item  
that you want to delete.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
p Touching [Clear History] allows you to de-  
lete all the entries.  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
item.  
Selecting a location stored  
in “Favorites”  
Storing locations you visit frequently saves  
time and effort.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
03  
Searching for and selecting a location  
Selecting the item on the list provides an easy  
way to specify the position.  
p “Favorites” can store up to 30 locations.  
2
Touch [Clear All].  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
3
Touch [Yes].  
and then touch [Favorites].  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
item.  
2
Touch the desired entry.  
Setting up a route to your  
home  
If your home location is stored, the route  
home can be calculated by touching a single  
key.  
%
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Return Home].  
When the route is not set, route calculation  
starts immediately.  
3
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
When the route is already set, a message will  
appear asking you to cancel the current route.  
Touch [Yes] to start the route calculation.  
p If the home location has not been stored  
yet, set the location first.  
= For details, refer to Setting your home po-  
sition on page 134.  
Setting a route by recalling  
a saved route  
Saving a route enables you to recall the same  
route. Selecting the item on the list provides  
an easy way to set the saved route.  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
Selecting the item on the list provides an easy  
way to specify the position.  
!
If there are no entries on the list, save the  
route first.  
= For details concerning other operations,  
refer to Storing the current route on page  
44.  
Deleting an entry in “Favorites”  
All entries in “Favorites” can be deleted at  
once.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Saved Routes].  
and then touch [Favorites].  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
03  
2
Touch the desired entry.  
4
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
When the route is not set, the saved route is  
recalled and the guidance will start im-  
mediately.  
Touching [Route...] and [Go Here Now] se-  
quentially enables you to set your selected po-  
sition as your destination and calculate the  
route up that point.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on the next page.  
Searching for a location by  
scrolling the map  
Specifying a location after scrolling the map  
enables you to set the position as an operable  
target in the “Map Confirmation Screen”.  
1
Press MAP button to display the navi-  
gation map screen.  
2
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the  
map to the desired position.  
3
Touch  
to display the “Map Confir-  
mation Screen”.  
The “Map Confirmation Screen” appears.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation Screen”  
Under most conditions after searching for a location, the “Map Confirmation Screen” appears to let you  
select the next operation. The options shown below are available on this screen:  
Map  
Route...  
Shows a full-screen 2D map centered on the  
cursor position.  
Save as...  
Places a map pin, and saves the position.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Save as... on the next page.  
Route...  
Sets the destination, waypoints, and starting  
point positions.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
Go Here Now  
Calculates the new route by setting the cursor  
position as the new destination.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Setting the location as a new desti-  
nation on the next page.  
refer to Route... on this page.  
Info  
Shows detailed information about the location  
of the cursor position.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Viewing the information of a speci-  
fied location on page 38.  
Add Via  
Recalculates the route by adding the cursor  
position as a waypoint.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Setting the location as a waypoint  
on the next page.  
Enables you to call the position if a telephone  
number is available. (Pairing with cellular  
phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology  
is required.)  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Dialing a phone number on the  
“Map Confirmation Screen” on page 58.  
Continue  
Recalculates the route by setting the cursor  
position as the new destination. The previous  
destination becomes a waypoint.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
04  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Replacing the location as the new  
final destination on this page.  
2
Touch [Go Here Now].  
When the route is not set, route calculation  
starts immediately.  
When the route is already set, a message will  
appear asking you to cancel the current route.  
Touch [Yes] to start the route calculation.  
p When the cursor overlaps with a destina-  
tion that has already been set, touch [Re-  
move Dest.] to cancel the current route or  
recalculate the route by setting one of the  
remaining waypoints as the destination.  
Starting Point  
Sets the location as a starting point.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Setting the location as the start  
point on this page.  
Save as...  
Setting the location as a  
waypoint  
1
Touch [Route...] on the “Map Confirma-  
tion Screen”.  
2
Touch [Add Via].  
When no waypoint is set, route calculation  
starts immediately.  
p When the cursor overlaps a waypoint al-  
ready set, touch [Remove Via] to delete the  
waypoint and recalculate the route.  
Add Pin  
Puts a map pin at the cursor position as a  
mark up.  
= For details, refer to Placing a map pin on the  
location on the next page.  
Replacing the location as  
the new final destination  
Add POI  
Stores the cursor position as a POI.  
= For details, refer to Registering the location  
as a customized POI on page 39.  
1
Touch [Route...] on the “Map Confirma-  
tion Screen”.  
Add Favorite  
Stores the cursor position as one of the “Fa-  
vorites”.  
= For details, refer to Storing the location in  
“Favorites” on page 40.  
2
Touch [Continue].  
p Recalculates the route by setting the cursor  
position as the new destination. The pre-  
vious destination becomes a waypoint.  
Setting the location as the  
start point  
Only setting the starting point is performed  
when there is no route. Otherwise, the new  
route from the starting point to the current  
destination will be recalculated.  
Setting the location as a  
new destination  
1
Touch [Route...] on the “Map Confirma-  
tion Screen”.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
1
Touch [Route...] on the “Map Confirma-  
1
tion Screen”.  
2
Touch [Starting Point].  
p When the cursor overlaps with a starting  
point already set, It changes to [Remove  
Start]. All waypoints already set are  
deleted.  
Viewing the information of  
a specified location  
2
1 The address and coordinates  
Locating the cursor to your desired position  
enables you to view detailed information about  
the location by using the “Map Confirmation  
Screen”.  
2 Information about a nearby POI  
5
Touch or to scroll the nearby POI list  
and then touch the desired POI.  
Touching one of the listed POIs enables you to  
view more detailed information about the POI.  
1
Press MAP button to display the navi-  
gation map screen.  
6
Touch [OK].  
2
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the  
If you touch [OK], the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” appears with a focus on the selected  
POI.  
map to the desired position.  
Placing a map pin on the  
location  
The pin-shaped icons called “map pins” can  
be used just like markers. Placing the colored  
pins on the map makes the position stand out  
and helps you to find the position easily later.  
3
Touch  
to display the “Map Confir-  
mation Screen”.  
The “Map Confirmation Screen” appears.  
4
Touch [Info] at the bottom of the “Map  
Confirmation Screen”.  
The “Point Info” screen appears.  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
04  
1
Search for a location or position the  
3
Touch [Add POI].  
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the  
map and displaying the “Map Confirmation  
Screen”.  
The list of POI categories appears.  
4
Touch the desired category to which  
the location is to be assigned.  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the “Map Confir-  
mation Screen”.  
3
Touch [Add Pin].  
The pin-shaped icon is placed on the map and  
the screen returns to the map screen.  
p The color of pin-shaped icon is assigned  
automatically within predefined colors  
when you set it up.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
Removing a map pin  
When the cursor overlaps a map pin that has  
already been set, you can remove the map pin.  
5
Touch [Add here] when the desired ca-  
1
Locate the cursor at the pin-shaped  
tegory list appears to add the item to it.  
If there aren’t any more detailed categories,  
the blank list appears. In such case, touching  
[Add here] allows you to add the item and  
register it as an item belonging to the category  
that you selected on the previous screen.  
p Touching [Add here] without selecting any  
category is invalid.  
icon and display the “Map Confirmation  
Screen”.  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the “Map Confir-  
mation Screen”.  
3
Touch [Remove Pins].  
The pin-shaped icon is removed and the  
screen returns to the map screen.  
6
Enter the desired name and then touch  
[Done] to complete the entry.  
Registering the location as  
a customized POI  
If a new business has opened, it may not be  
found in the database. Registering the loca-  
tion as a new POI allows you to use the item  
just like a preinstalled POI.  
1
Search for a location or position the  
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the  
map and displaying the “Map Confirmation  
Screen”.  
The registration is now complete and the item  
is available as a customized POI.  
p You can edit the stored POI later in “Man-  
age POI”.  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the “Map Confir-  
mation Screen”.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Editing your customized POI on  
page 132.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
04  
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
Storing the location in  
“Favorites”  
and then touch [Favorites].  
2
Touch [Clear All].  
Storing your favorite locations as “Favorites”  
provides you with the opportunity to save the  
time and effort of re-entering this information.  
Stored items can be made available on “Fa-  
vorites” later.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Selecting a location stored in “Fa-  
vorites” on page 33.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
item.  
p “Favorites” can store up to 30 locations.  
1
Search for a location or position the  
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the  
map and displaying the “Map Confirmation  
Screen”.  
2
Touch [Save as...] on the “Map Confir-  
mation Screen”.  
3
4
Touch [Add Favorite].  
Touch the desired entry.  
Selecting an item that has already been stored  
allows you to overwrite it.  
5
Enter the desired name and then touch  
[Done] to complete the entry.  
Storage has been completed and the item is  
available as a preset entry on “Favorites”.  
Deleting an entry in  
“Favorites”  
All entries in “Favorites” can be deleted at  
once.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Checking the current route  
05  
Checking the current route  
conditions  
1
2
3
4
The “Route Information” screen provides you  
with various detailed information about the  
current route.  
This is an example showing a route with two  
waypoints.  
p This function is available only when the  
route is set and your vehicle position is on  
the route.  
5
6
p You can also display the “Route Informa-  
tion” screen by touching “Multi-Info win-  
dow” on the map screen.  
7
8
= For details, refer to Multi-Info window  
on page 21.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
1 Starting point  
2 Current position  
3 Waypoint  
2
Touch [Route info].  
4 Destination  
5 Time and distance up to the point currently  
shown  
The remaining distance and time, as well as  
the estimated time of arrival are displayed.  
6 The route calculation method that is cur-  
rently set “Method:”  
= For details, refer to Route on page 127.  
7 Point currently shown and information re-  
garding the point  
The “Route Information” screen appears.  
8 The route conditions up to the point cur-  
rently shown  
Touching the icon enables you to check the  
details. If there are five or more icons, touch  
to show the next four icons.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
05  
Checking the current route  
3
Touch [Dest.] to switch to the screen for  
Checking the entire route  
overview on the map  
first waypoint.  
You can check the entire outline of the current  
route.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
2
Touch [Route info].  
The “Route Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Fit to Screen].  
A 2D map screen will appear with the current  
overall route fitted onto the screen.  
The “Route Information (to via)” screen ap-  
pears.  
4
Touch [Via] to switch to the second  
waypoint screen.  
The “Route Information (to via)” screen for  
next waypoint appears.  
Checking the current itinerary  
You can check the route details.  
p This function is available only when the  
route is set and your vehicle position is on  
the route.  
5
Touch [Via] to return to the screen for  
whole route.  
The “Route Information” screen appears.  
p If three or more waypoints are set, each  
touch of [Via] shows the screen for the next  
waypoint.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
2
3
Touch [Itinerary].  
Touch or to scroll the list.  
Playing simulated travel at  
high speed  
Scroll the list as necessary.  
This function allows you to play the simulated  
navigation function at high speed without  
voice guidance. This function is useful if you  
want to browse how the current route will be  
navigated.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
1
3
2
Touch [Route info].  
The “Route Information” screen appears.  
1 Turning direction  
2 Driving distance  
3
Touch [Fly over].  
3 Names of the streets you are driving  
through  
The simulation will start.  
p If you want to stop the simulation, touch  
on the map.  
4
Touch [Mode].  
Each touch of [Mode] changes the list mode.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Checking the current route  
05  
Alternative options:  
!
!
!
Detailed Instructions  
All turning points, passed streets and other  
information is shown.  
Instructions  
All turning points (where voice guidance is  
given) are shown.  
Road List  
Displays the turning points with the most  
simplified condition (the duplicate route  
names are merged into one.).  
p When a long distance route is calculated,  
your navigation system may not be able to  
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining  
roads will be shown in the list as you drive  
on.)  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
06  
Editing waypoints and the destination  
Editing waypoints  
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to  
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-  
culate the route so that is passes through  
these locations.  
Adding a waypoint  
1
Search for a location.  
= For more details, refer to the descriptions  
from page 25 to page 35.  
Touching [Optimize] sorts the waypoints auto-  
matically so that the route will compromise  
the least time and distance.  
2
Touch [Route...] on the “Map Confirma-  
4
Touch [Done].  
tion Screen”.  
The route is recalculated and the map of the  
current position appears.  
3
Touch [Add Via].  
When no waypoint is set, route calculation  
starts immediately.  
Deleting a waypoint  
You can delete waypoints from the route and  
then recalculate the route. (You can delete  
waypoints successively.)  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Sorting waypoints on this page.  
p When you set waypoints in the route to your  
destination, the route up to the next way-  
point will appear in light green. The rest of  
the route will appear in light blue.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
2
Touch [Edit Route].  
Sorting waypoints  
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the  
route.  
The “Edit Route” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Delete] on the right of the way-  
point that you want to delete.  
The waypoint will be deleted from the list.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
4
Touch [Done].  
2
Touch [Edit Route].  
The route is recalculated and the map of the  
current position appears.  
The “Edit Route” screen appears.  
3
Touch [i] or [j] to move the waypoint  
or destination.  
Put them in the desired order.  
Storing the current route  
Storing the current route allows you to recall  
and set the stored route.  
p This function is available only when the  
route is set and your vehicle position is on  
the route.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Route Function].  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Editing waypoints and the destination  
06  
2
3
Touch [Save Route].  
Enter the desired name and then touch  
[Done] to complete the entry.  
The previous screen appears.  
Deleting the entry in “Saved  
Routes”  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Saved Routes].  
2
Touch [Delete] on the right of the item  
that you want to delete.  
p Because deleted data cannot be restored,  
take extra care not to mistakenly delete  
item.  
Deleting the current route  
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-  
tion, follow the steps below to delete the cur-  
rent route and cancel the route guidance.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [Delete Route].  
A message confirming the cancellation of the  
current route appears.  
2
Touch [Yes].  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
If you have an active subscription to MSN Di-  
General flow chart:  
1 Check your product key.  
rect service, you can check and browse var-  
ious information on your navigation system,  
such as gas prices, movie times, weather con-  
ditions and traffic information. The informa-  
tion will be updated periodically.  
You have to know your product key for the  
subscription.  
(Refer to Checking your product key on this  
page.)  
— This function is available for AVIC-F900BT  
and AVIC-F90BT.  
j
2 Make an online subscription to MSN Direct  
service using your PC.  
(Refer to Subscribing to the MSN Direct ser-  
Notice about MSN Direct™  
Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of  
the MSN Direct content. The MSN Direct con-  
tent may not be current or available at times,  
and is subject to change without notice. To re-  
ceive MSN Direct content, you must subscribe  
to the MSN Direct service, and you must be  
within the MSN Direct coverage area. Cover-  
age may also be affected by the availability and  
relative strength of FM transmissions, as well  
as reception limitations of Microsoft’s Direct-  
Band network.  
vice on the next page.)  
j
3 Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro-  
duct.  
(Refer to Activating the MSN Direct function  
on the next page.)  
j
4 Activation is complete.  
Checking your product key  
The product key that you can find here is used  
in the online subscription.  
Please visit  
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer  
or current coverage area maps, subscription  
details, and other important information about  
MSN Direct.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Status].  
Activating the service  
You have to activate MSN Direct first.  
p A web-connected computer is required for  
the online subscription.  
3
Write your product key down in the fol-  
lowing box;  
p If you have difficulty for the online subscrip-  
tion, please call toll-free 1-866-658-7032.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
07  
Subscribing to the MSN Direct  
service  
Browsing gas prices  
Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are  
Within two days of completing the subscription,  
displayed in a list.  
execute Activating the MSN Direct function.  
This informations does not necessarily corre-  
spond to actual information. Utilize the infor-  
mation for your reference.  
It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be-  
come available under the following conditions:  
1
Access the following URL and read the  
description.  
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer  
2
Be sure to check the coverage area and  
other availabilities of MSN Direct on the  
web page.  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
3
Move to the page for activation and  
!
enter your product key.  
4
Follow the directions on the web page  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
to complete the subscription.  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
Activating the MSN Direct function  
After the online subscription, complete the ac-  
tivation so that the navigation system can re-  
ceive the information.  
2
Touch [Gas Prices].  
This operation must be performed under the  
following conditions  
— You are currently in the coverage area of  
MSN Direct.  
— The signal strength (  
) on “MSN Direct”  
screen is not weak.  
1
2
Boot-up your navigation system.  
3
Touch the desired tab to change the  
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
sort order.  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
Check the signal strength. If the signal is  
weak, move to another location where a stron-  
ger signal can be received.  
3
Touch [Status].  
4
Wait until the activation status changes  
to “Active”.  
It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to  
complete the activation.  
After activation is complete, the information  
will be available on each menu.  
Available options;  
!
[Distance] (default):  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
[Price]:  
Sorts the items in the list by price.  
This informations does not necessarily corre-  
spond to actual information. Utilize the infor-  
mation for your reference.  
It may take up to 6 hours for all the data to be-  
come available under the following conditions:  
!
!
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
4
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
!
Searching for a theater by  
selecting a movie title  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
3
Touch [Movie Times].  
1 The names of gas stations and their loca-  
tions  
2 Gas prices  
Touch [All Movie Titles].  
The movie titles now showing are displayed.  
The information in ( ) shows how current  
the information is.  
4
Touch the desired movie title.  
The theaters that are currently showing the se-  
lected movie are displayed.  
3 Distance from the current position  
5
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
Browsing movie times  
Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list.  
Switching the screen allows you to see the  
movie title now showing.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
07  
5
Touch the desired tab to change the  
Searching for a movie title by  
selecting a theater  
sort order.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Movie Times].  
The nearby theaters are displayed.  
3
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options;  
!
[Distance] (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
6
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
Available options;  
!
[Distance] (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
[Name]:  
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
4
Touch the desired theater.  
The movie titles currently shown on the se-  
lected theater are displayed.  
1
2
5
Touch on the item that you want to  
1 The names of theaters and their locations  
view in detail.  
2 Distance from the current position  
6
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
7
Touch on of the options at the bottom  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
of the “Map Confirmation Screen” to select  
the next operation.  
= For details concerning other operations on  
the “Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to  
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation  
Screen” on page 36.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
07  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
3
Touch [Worldwide].  
Browsing weather  
information  
Local weather information can be displayed  
on a list. Switching the screen allows you to  
see worldwide weather conditions.  
Worldwide weather conditions are displayed.  
The area name, distance and direction from  
current position are displayed on the list. The  
list is sorted alphabetically by the area name.  
4
Touch the desired area.  
Detailed information is displayed.  
This informations does not necessarily corre-  
spond to actual information. Utilize the infor-  
mation for your reference.  
Using traffic information  
You can view current traffic conditions and in-  
formation. When the navigation system re-  
ceives updated traffic information, it will  
overlay the traffic information on your map  
and also display detailed text information  
when available.  
Checking the local weather  
information  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
In the default setting, the navigation system  
takes into account traffic information and tries  
to avoid traffic jam and suggests better routes.  
Also, when you are traveling along a route and  
the system finds another better route for avoid-  
ing the traffic jam, the current route will be re-  
calculated automatically.  
The term “traffic jam” in this section indicates  
the following types of traffic conditions:  
— Stop-and-go traffic  
2
Touch [Weather].  
The local weather information is displayed.  
The area name, distance and direction from  
current position are displayed on the list. The  
items on the list are sorted by distance.  
3
Touch the desired area.  
Detailed information is displayed.  
— Stopped traffic  
— Closed/blocked roads  
Viewing the traffic list  
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in  
the form of a list. This allows you to check how  
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-  
cation and their distance from your current po-  
sition.  
Touching [Forecast] displays the weather fore-  
casts for these three days.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
Checking worldwide weather  
conditions  
2
Touch [Traffic].  
A list with traffic information that has been re-  
ceived is shown. The list is sorted by distance  
from your current position.  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed on the list.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Weather].  
The local weather information is displayed.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
07  
Setting the traffic information  
1
2
3
Preferred functions related to traffic informa-  
tion can be set.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
2
Touch [Traffic] and then touch [Set-  
tings].  
The “Traffic Settings” screen appears.  
1 Event-related icon  
2 Street or location and direction  
3 Distance to the location and event  
Touching the desired item allows you to check  
its position on the map.  
How to read traffic information  
on the map  
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
p Further zooming out hides the lines and  
icons of traffic information.  
Available options;  
!
“Recalculate to avoid traffic”  
[Enabled]:  
Calculates the new route with the traffic  
congestion taken into account when rerout-  
ing.  
Traffic event icon  
[Disabled]:  
Calculates the new route without the traffic  
congestion taken into account when rerout-  
ing.  
!
!
“Sort events by”  
[Distance]:  
Sorts the traffic event items in the list by  
distance.  
[Type]:  
Sorts the traffic event items in the list by  
event type.  
“Use traffic information”  
[On]:  
Calculates the route with the traffic conges-  
tion taken into account in the initial calcula-  
tion.  
!
!
!
!
with red line:  
Stop-and-go traffic  
with red line:  
Stopped traffic  
with red line:  
Closed/blocked roads  
etc.:  
[Off]:  
Accidents, constructions, etc.  
Calculates the route without the traffic con-  
gestion taken into account in the initial  
calculation.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
Hands-free phoning overview  
Displaying the Phone Menu  
Use the “Phone Menu” if you connect the cel-  
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-  
tion.  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as  
much as possible while driving.  
1
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®  
technology, this navigation system can be con-  
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using  
this hands-free function, you can operate the  
navigation system to make or receive phone  
calls. You can also transfer the phone book  
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-  
gation system. This section describes how to  
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-  
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
technology on the navigation system.  
Menu”.  
2
Touch [Phone].  
1
2 3  
4
For more information about the connectivity  
with the mobile phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology, refer to the information  
on our website.  
1
: Network name of the cellular phone  
company  
: Reception status of the cellular phone  
: Battery status of the cellular phone  
: Name of connected cellular phone  
2
3
4
Preparing communication  
devices  
This navigation system has a built-in function  
to use cellular phones featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology.  
Registering your cellular  
phone  
You need to register your cellular phone featur-  
ing Bluetooth wireless technology when you  
connect it for the first time. A total of three  
phones can be registered. Three registration  
methods are available:  
While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology is connected, the Blue-  
tooth connection status indicator lights.  
= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free  
phoning on page 62.  
p When the power of the navigation system  
turns off, the Bluetooth connection is also  
disconnected. When the system restarts,  
the system automatically attempts to re-  
connect the previously-connected cellular  
phone. Even when the connection is sev-  
ered for some reason, the system automati-  
cally reconnects the specified cellular  
phone (except when the connection is sev-  
ered due to cellular phone operations).  
!
!
!
Searching for nearby phones  
Searching for a specified phone  
Pairing from your mobile phone  
p If you try to register more than three cellu-  
lar phones, the system will ask you to select  
one of the registered cellular phones to  
overwrite.  
= For details, refer to Connecting a regis-  
tered cellular phone on page 55.  
p The default device name displayed on the  
cellular phone is “Pioneer Navi”. The PIN  
code is “1111”.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Searching for nearby phones  
The system searches for available cellular  
phones near the navigation system and dis-  
plays them in a list, and registers them for  
connection.  
08  
A message promptings you to enter a PIN  
code appears.  
7
Enter the PIN code “1111” using the cel-  
lular phone.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your cellular phone.  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears, the screen returns to the “Phone  
Settings” menu by touching [OK].  
Menu on the previous page.  
3
4
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Add Device], and then [Search  
devices].  
Searching for a specified phone  
If you cannot connect your phone in the regu-  
lar two methods previously described, try this  
method if your phone is found in the list.  
The system searches for cellular phones with  
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the  
connection and displays them in the list if the  
device has found.  
p Up to 10 cellular phones will be listed in the  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
order that the cellular phone is found.  
nology on your cellular phone.  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
5
Wait until your cellular phone appears  
in the list.  
p If you cannot find the cellular phone you  
want to connect, check that the cellular  
phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless  
technology connection.  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
6
Touch the cellular phone name you  
Menu on the previous page.  
want to register.  
3
4
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Add Device], and then [Select  
specific devices].  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
5
Touch the model name of the cellular  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
phone to be connected.  
nology on your cellular phone.  
The system searches for cellular phones with  
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the  
connection and displays them in the list if the  
device has found.  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
3
Touch [Add Device], and then [Pair from  
the mobile phone].  
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth  
wireless technology connection.  
p If you cannot find the desired model name  
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search  
the cellular phones available nearby.  
6
Select the cellular phone you want to  
register from the list.  
A message promptings you to enter a PIN  
code appears.  
7
Enter the PIN code “1111” using the cel-  
lular phone.  
4
Register the navigation system on your  
cellular phone.  
If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-  
word, enter the PIN code (password) of the na-  
vigation system.  
After the registration is completed, the follow-  
ing screen appears.  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears, the screen returns to the “Phone  
Settings” menu by touching [OK].  
Pairing from your mobile phone  
You can register the cellular phone by setting  
the navigation system to standby mode and re-  
questing connection from the cellular phone.  
p If registration fails repeat the procedure  
from the beginning.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears, the screen returns to the “Phone  
Settings” menu by touching [OK].  
p If another cellular phone is already con-  
nected, touch [Disconnect] next to the cel-  
lular phone name to disconnect it, and start  
connection.  
Connecting a registered  
cellular phone  
The navigation system automatically connects  
the cellular phone selected as the target of  
connection. However, connect the cellular  
phone manually in the following cases:  
!
Two or more cellular phones are registered,  
and you want to manually select the cellu-  
lar phone to be used.  
p To cancel the connection to your cellular  
phone, touch [Cancel].  
!
!
You want to reconnect a disconnected cel-  
lular phone.  
Connection cannot be established automa-  
tically for some reason.  
p If connection fails, check to see whether  
your cellular phone is waiting for a connec-  
tion and then retry.  
If you start connection manually, carry out the  
following procedure. You can also connect the  
phone by having the navigation system detect  
it automatically.  
= For details, refer to Setting the automatic  
connection on page 62.  
Disconnecting a cellular phone  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
2
3
Touch [Connection].  
nology on your cellular phone.  
Touch [Disconnect] next to the cellular  
For some cellular phones, no specific action is  
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your cellular phone.  
phone name.  
Deleting a registered phone  
2
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
If you no longer need to use a registered  
phone with the navigation system, you can de-  
lete it from the registration assignment to free  
this spot up for another phone.  
Menu on page 52.  
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the  
phone book entries and call history lists  
that correspond to the phone will be also  
cleared.  
3
4
Touch [Connection].  
Touch the name of the cellular phone  
that you want to connect.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
2
3
Touch [Connection].  
Touch [Delete] next to the cellular  
phone name.  
The registration is canceled.  
Connection starts.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
Receiving a phone call  
You can perform hands-free answering by  
using the navigation system.  
Answering an incoming call  
The system informs you that it is receiving a  
call by displaying a message and producing a  
ring sound once.  
If [Auto Answer Preference] is set to [Off],  
answer the call manually. Answering is avail-  
able if any screen is displayed, such as the  
map screen or the setting screen.  
p You can set this navigation system to auto-  
matically answer incoming calls.  
3
Touch  
to end the call.  
The call ends.  
p When there is an incoming call, pressing  
MULTI-CONTROL answers the call. During  
the call, pressing MULTI-CONTROL gets  
you off the phone.  
p If the voice on the other end of the call is  
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume  
of the received voice.  
= For details, refer to Answering a call  
automatically on page 61.  
1
When a call comes in, the answering  
= For more details about “Phone Vo-  
lume”, refer to Setting the phone volume  
on page 60.  
operation menu appears on the bottom of  
the screen.  
p You cannot carry out operations other than  
answering calls.  
p You may hear a noise when you hang up  
the phone.  
2
To answer an incoming call, touch  
.
Rejecting an incoming call  
You can reject an incoming call.  
= For details, refer to Answering a call auto-  
matically on page 61.  
%
When a call comes in, touch  
.
The call is rejected.  
p The rejected call is recorded in the missed  
call history list.  
= For details, refer to Dialing from the history  
on the next page.  
When there is an incoming call, you can reject  
the call by touching  
.
p You can adjust volume when you are talk-  
ing. To adjust volume, touch [Vol -] and  
[Vol +] displayed on the screen (like below)  
when you are talking.  
Making a phone call  
You can make a phone call in many different  
ways.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Direct dialing  
08  
1
Touch [Dialed Numbers] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
1
Touch [Dial Pad] on the “Phone Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
Menu on page 52.  
The direct dial screen appears.  
2
If you touch an entry on the list, dialing  
starts.  
p If you touch [Detail], you can check the de-  
tails of the party before making a phone  
call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
2
Touch the number keys to enter the  
phone number.  
The phone number that was input is dis-  
played.  
Input number  
dialing, touch  
.
3
Touch to end the call.  
Making a phone call using the  
received call history  
The received call history saves 30 calls per re-  
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
1
Touch [Received Calls] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
:
The input number is deleted letter-by-letter  
from the end of the number. Continuing to  
press this deletes all of the numbers.  
Menu on page 52.  
2
If you touch an entry on the list, dialing  
:
starts.  
p If you touch [Detail], you can check the de-  
Return to the previous screen.  
tails of the party before making a phone  
call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
3
Touch  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
to make a call.  
.
dialing, touch  
.
4
Touch to end the call.  
3
Touch to end the call.  
Dialing from the history  
Making a phone call using missed  
call history  
The missed call history saves 20 calls per re-  
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 20, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
The most recent calls made (dialed), received  
and missed are stored in the call history list.  
You can browse the call history list and call  
numbers from it.  
1
Touch [Missed Calls] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
Making a phone call using the dialed  
number history  
The dialed number history saves 30 calls per  
registered cellular phone. If the entries exceed  
30, the oldest one will be deleted.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
2
If you touch an entry on the list, dialing  
Touching [Others] displays the page including  
entries that are not assigned to any of the  
other tabs.  
starts.  
p If you touch [Detail], you can check the de-  
tails of the party before making a phone  
call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
4
Touch the desired entry on the list to  
make a call.  
dialing, touch  
.
5
Touch  
to end the call.  
3
Touch to end the call.  
Dialing a phone number on the  
“Map Confirmation Screen”  
Calling a number in the  
You can make a call to the searched location  
or the location that you are selecting on the  
map screen if the telephone number exists.  
“Contacts” screen  
After finding the entry you want to call in the  
“Contacts” screen, you can select the number  
and make the call.  
1
To display the “Map Confirmation  
Screen”, search for a locations or moves  
the cursor and touch  
1
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
.
Menu”.  
2
Touch to make a call.  
2
Touch [Contacts].  
The “Contacts” screen appears.  
3
Switch the page of the list to display  
the desired entry.  
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to  
the first page of the contacts whose names  
start with that letter.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
3
Touch  
to end the call.  
Making a call home easily  
You can call home without taking the time to  
enter the phone number if the phone number  
has been registered.  
or  
:
Shows the next or previous page.  
Alphabet tabs  
Makes the screen jump to the beginning of  
the page including the entry whose names  
start with any of selected alphabets.  
Touching [#ABCDE] also displays the page in-  
cluding the entry whose names start with pri-  
mary symbols or numbers.  
%
Touch [Call Home] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
Dialing home starts.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
p If you have not registered your home num-  
ber, a message appears. Touch [Yes] to  
start registration.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
= For more details about “Set Home”,  
refer to Setting your home position on  
page 134.  
Transferring the phone book  
You can transfer the numbers in a registered  
user phone’s address book into the phone  
book.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer the entire phone book  
at once. In this case, transfer addresses  
one at a time from your phone book using  
your cellular phone.  
p The maximum 400 entries can be trans-  
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-  
ceed 400, the extra entries will not be  
transferred. If more than one number is re-  
gistered for one person, such as work place  
and home, each number is counted sepa-  
rately.  
Dialing GOOG-411  
You can dial GOOG-411, the free phone service  
with one touch.  
1
Touch [GOOG-411] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
Dialing GOOG-411 starts.  
2
You can now use the GOOG-411 phone  
service.  
For details about the GOOG-411 phone service,  
contact the service provider.  
p Each entry can hold up to 3 phone num-  
bers.  
p Depending on the cellular phone that is  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-  
tem may not be able to display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled.)  
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be correctly transferred.  
Announcing incoming  
short mails  
While the cellular phone and the navigation  
system are connected, the following notice is  
displayed when you get a new SMS message.  
“New mail from: (sender’s name)” is dis-  
played and the notice disappears after eight  
seconds.  
1
Connect the cellular phone that has the  
phone book to transfer.  
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered  
cellular phone on page 55.  
2
Touch [Phone Book Transfer] on the  
“Phone Menu”.  
The confirmation messages appear.  
3
Check the messages and touch [OK].  
p If there is a phone book already transferred,  
a message asking whether you can accept  
the data replacement appears.  
p If you want to delete the message, touch  
anywhere on the screen.  
p If the voice language with TTS is currently  
used, the audible message can be output.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the lan-  
guage on page 135.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
4
Check that the following screen is dis-  
2
Touch [Clear Memory].  
played, and operate your cellular phone to  
transfer the phone book entries.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
Transfer starts. It may take time depending on  
how many entries will be transferred.  
p You can send the phone book entries re-  
peatedly before touching [OK]. If your cellu-  
lar phone supports one-by-one transfer  
only, send all the entries that you want to  
transfer before touching [OK].  
Contacts:  
You can clear the registered phone book.  
Received Calls List:  
You can clear the received call history list.  
Dialed Calls List:  
You can clear the dialed call history list.  
Missed Calls List:  
p If your phone has a capability for automatic  
transfer of phone book, this screen is  
skipped and transfer will start.  
p The transferred data can not be edited on  
the navigation system.  
You can clear the missed call history list.  
p Touching [Clear] displays the confirmation  
message for clearing the memory.  
p Touching [Clear All] clears all the data that  
correspond to the connected cellular  
phone.  
5
When the completion message ap-  
pears, check the message and touch [OK].  
3
Touch [OK].  
Transfer ends.  
Data on the selected item is cleared from this  
navigation system’s memory.  
p If you do not want to clear memory that you  
have selected, touch [Cancel].  
Clearing memory  
You can clear the memory of each item that  
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:  
phone book, dialled/received/missed call his-  
tory list and preset dials.  
Setting the phone  
Setting the phone volume  
The volume level related with the hands-free  
phoning can be adjusted.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
1
Touch [Phone Volume] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
2
Adjust volume to touch the sliders of  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
[Phone Ringtone] and [Phone Voice].  
Menu on page 52.  
2
Touch any key next to [Auto Answer  
Preference] (such as [Off], [After 3 seconds]  
keys).  
Auto Answer Preference selection appears.  
3
Touch the item to configure.  
[Phone Ringtone]:  
This setting controls the incoming ring tone  
volume.  
[Phone Voice]:  
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-  
lume.  
p Phone volume varies depending on the in-  
coming caller's phone, volume setting and  
other conditions.  
[Off]: No automatic response. Respond manu-  
ally  
[Immediately]: Answers immediately  
[After 3 seconds]: Answers after three sec-  
onds  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Answering an incoming call on page  
56.  
[After 6 seconds]: Answers after six seconds  
[After 10 seconds]: Answers after ten sec-  
onds  
Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission  
You can stop transmission of electric waves by  
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do  
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we  
recommend selecting [Off].  
Setting the automatic rejection  
function  
If this function is on, the navigation system  
automatically rejects all incoming calls.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
2
Touch [Off] on [Bluetooth On/Off].  
Menu on page 52.  
Touching [Bluetooth On/Off] switching be-  
tween [On] and [Off].  
2
Touch [Refuse All Calls].  
Touching [Refuse All Calls] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
p If both the automatic reject and automatic  
answer functions are set to [On], automatic  
reject is prioritized and all incoming calls  
are automatically rejected.  
Answering a call automatically  
The navigation system automatically answers  
an incoming call to the cellular phone. You  
can answer a call while holding the steering  
wheel while you are driving.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
p If the [Refuse All Calls] is set to [On], re-  
jected incoming calls will not be stored in  
the missed call list.  
Editing the device name  
You can change the device name to be dis-  
played on your cellular phone. (Default is  
[Pioneer Navi].)  
Echo canceling and noise reduction  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
When you are operating hands-free phoning  
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesired  
echo. This function reduces the undesired  
echo and noise while you are doing hands-free  
phoning, and maintains a certain sound qual-  
ity.  
Menu on page 52.  
2
Touch [Edit Name].  
The keyboard to enter the name appears.  
3
Touch to delete the current name,  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
and enter the new name by using the key-  
board.  
Menu on page 52.  
2
Touch [Echo Cancel].  
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Setting the automatic connection  
When an automatic connection is active, the  
navigation system will automatically establish  
a connection with a registered phone when it  
comes into range. Using this feature will re-  
lease you from all of the processes for estab-  
lishing a connection.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to perform automatic connection.  
p This unit does not initiate an automatic  
connection to your registered phone while  
you are operating in the “Function” menu  
for hands-free phoning.  
4
Touch [Done].  
The name is changed.  
p Up to 30 characters can be entered for a de-  
vice name.  
Notes for hands-free phoning  
General notes  
!
Connection to all cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-  
anteed.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
!
The line-of-sight distance between this na-  
vigation system and your cellular phone  
must be 10 meters or less when sending  
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth  
technology. However, the transmission dis-  
tance may become shorter than the esti-  
mated distance, depending on the  
environment in use.  
Menu on page 52.  
2
Touch [Auto Connect].  
Touching [Auto Connect] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
p Automatic connection is performed in the  
registration number order.  
p Some cellular phones do not support auto-  
matic connection.  
!
With some cellular phones, the speakers of  
the system may not produce a ring sound.  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
08  
!
If private mode is selected on the cellular  
phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-  
formed.  
!
!
You cannot make a call to the entry of an  
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-  
ceived call history.  
If calls are made by operating your cellular  
phone, no history data will be recorded in  
the navigation system.  
Registration and connection  
!
Cellular phone operations vary depending  
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the  
instruction manual that came with your cel-  
lular phone for detailed instructions.  
Depending on the mobile phone, transfer-  
ring phone book may not work even though  
your phone can be pairing with the naviga-  
tion system. In such case, disconnect your  
phone, perform pairing again from your  
phone to the navigation system, and then  
perform the phone book transfer.  
About phone book transfers  
!
If there are more than 400 phone book en-  
tries on your mobile phone, all entries may  
not be able to be downloaded completely.  
With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer all items in the phone  
book at one time. In this case, transfer  
items one by one from your cellular phone.  
Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-  
gation system may not display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled or first name and last name are in  
reverse order.)  
If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-  
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book transfer may not be available.  
!
!
!
Making and receiving calls  
!
You may hear a noise in the following situa-  
tions:  
— When you answer the phone by using  
the button on the phone.  
— When the person on the other end of  
line hangs up the phone.  
If the person on the other end of the phone  
call cannot hear the conversation due to an  
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-  
free phoning. This may reduce the effects  
of the echo.  
!
!
!
!
!
With some cellular phones, even if you  
press the accept button on the cellular  
phone when a call comes in, hands-free  
phoning may not be performed.  
The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in the phone book. When one phone  
number is registered under different  
names, the name that comes first alphabe-  
tically is displayed.  
!
If the phone number of the received call is  
not registered in the phone book, the  
phone number of the received call appears.  
The received call history and the dialed  
number history  
!
Calls made or editing performed only on  
your cellular phone will not be reflected to  
the dialed number history or phone book in  
the navigation system.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
08  
Using hands-free phoning  
Updating the Bluetooth  
wireless technology software  
Downloading the files of updating will be avail-  
able in the future. You will be able to download  
the latest update from appropriate website by  
using your PC.  
p Before you download the files and install  
the update, read through the instructions  
on the website. For the procedure before  
you display the screen used for updating,  
follow the instructions on the website.  
1
Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 52.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Software Update].  
The current version is displayed.  
3
Touch [Software Update].  
Update starts.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing the audio CD  
09  
You can play a normal music CD using the  
built-in drive of the navigation system. This  
section describes these operations.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Touch panel keys  
1
2
1
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.  
3
4
2
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “CD” screen.  
5
6
7
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
to control the disc.  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
3 Switching the playing part  
= For details, refer to Switching the play-  
ing part on page 67.  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
4 Skipping the track forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current track. Touching it again will skip  
to the previous track.  
Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching [o] or [p] to perform fast  
rewind or forward.  
p Fast rewind is canceled when it reaches  
the beginning of the first track on the  
disc.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Track number indicator  
Shows the number of the track currently play-  
ing.  
3 Repeat/Random/Scan indicator  
The marks shown below indicate the current  
playback status.  
5 Playback and Pause  
and repeat range: Displays the current  
repeat range  
Touching [f] switches between “playback”  
and “pause”.  
6 Shuffle All  
: Random  
All of the songs in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
p [Shuffle All] is not available for AVIC-  
F700BT and AVIC-F7010BT.  
: Scan  
4 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
track.  
p To cancel the random play, switch [Ran-  
dom] to [Off] on the “Function” menu.  
7 Displaying the map screen  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
09  
Playing the audio CD  
!
Track — Repeats just the current track  
Selecting a track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles, file  
names or folder names on a disc and select  
one of them to play.  
p If you perform track search or fast for-  
ward/rewind, repeat play is automati-  
cally canceled.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off].  
3 Scan tracks of a CD  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first  
10 seconds of each track on the CD. When  
you find the desired track touch [Scan] to  
turn scan play off.  
p After the scanning of a CD is finished,  
normal playback of the tracks will begin  
again.  
1
2
Touch [List].  
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[Detail].  
p Touching or switches the selection to  
the next or previous page in the list.  
p The “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-  
responding information.  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “CD” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
2
Touch [Func].  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
Disc — Repeats the current disc  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
10  
: Random  
You can play an disc that contains com-  
pressed audio files using the built-in drive of  
the navigation system. This section describes  
these operations.  
p AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT cannot play  
WAV files.  
p In the following description, the MP3,  
WMA, AAC, WAV files are collectively re-  
ferred to as “Compressed audio file”.  
: Scan  
5 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
6 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
track.  
7 Folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
8 Song number indicator  
Shows the number of the song playing in the  
selected list.  
1
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.  
9 Song title indicator  
Shows the title of the current song.  
a Artist name indicator  
Shows the artist name of the current song.  
b Album title indicator  
Shows the title of the album for the current  
song.  
2
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “ROM” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
3
Use this ROM screen to play the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on this page.  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
Reading the screen  
12  
3
5
4
6
4
5
7
8
6
7
8
9
a
b
1 Switching the playing part  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types such, you can switch  
between media files types to play.  
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between  
the following media file types:  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video files)  
p This touch panel key appears only when  
playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
3 Track indicator  
Shows the track number currently playing.  
4 Repeat/Random/Scan indicator  
The marks shown below indicate the current  
playback status.  
2 Recalls equalizer curves  
and repeat range: Displays the current  
repeat range  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
10  
Playing music files on ROM  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
Selecting a track from the list  
The list lets you see the list of track titles or  
folder names on a disc. If you touch a folder  
on the list, you can view its contents. You can  
play a track on the list by touching it.  
3 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
4 Select the previous or next folder  
p Touching these keys enables you to se-  
lect the previous or next folder and play-  
back the first track on the folder. You  
cannot select a folder that does not  
have a compressed audio file.  
5 Skipping the track forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current track. Touching it again will skip  
to the previous track.  
1
Touch [List].  
The list of track titles and folder names ap-  
pears.  
2
Touch your desired folder or track on  
the list.  
Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching [o] or [p] to perform fast  
rewind or forward.  
p Fast rewind is cancelled when it reaches  
the beginning of the first file on the re-  
peat range.  
p In the case of compressed audio files,  
there is no sound on fast rewind or for-  
ward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
Touching  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
displays the content of the upper  
p If the selected folder does not contain any  
playable track, the track list is not dis-  
played.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between “playback”  
and “pause”.  
7 Shuffle All  
Browsing embedded text  
information  
Text information recorded in a compressed  
audio file disc can be displayed.  
All of the songs in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
p If the disc contains a mixture of various  
media file types, all tracks within the  
current part (“CD” or “ROM”) are played  
randomly.  
%
Touch  
.
The next piece of information is displayed.  
p [Shuffle All] is not available for AVIC-  
F700BT and AVIC-F7010BT.  
!
!
!
!
!
Album Title : (album title)  
Track Title : (track title)  
Folder Title : (folder title)  
File Name : (file name)  
Artist Name : (artist name)  
p To cancel the random play, switch [Ran-  
dom] to [Off] on the “Function” menu.  
8 Displaying the map screen  
If specific information has not been recorded  
on compressed audio files on disc, nothing  
may be displayed.  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
10  
p If you do not operate functions within about  
30 seconds, the display automatically re-  
turns to the ordinary display.  
Touching [Random] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in  
the current repeat play range are randomly  
played.  
p If you turn [Random] to [On] when the  
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “ROM” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
3 Scan folders and tracks  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each track. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]  
and [Off]. When you find the desired track  
touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.  
p After completion of track or folder scan-  
ning, normal playback of the tracks will  
begin again.  
2
Touch [Func].  
p If you turn [Random] to [On] when the  
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-  
peat play range changes to [Folder]  
automatically.  
p If you turn [Scan] to [On] while the re-  
peat play range is set to [Disc], scan  
play is performed for only the first tracks  
of each folder.  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
Folder — Repeats the current folder  
Disc — Repeats all compressed audio  
files  
!
Track — Repeats just the current track  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
[Disc].  
p If you perform fast forward/rewind dur-  
ing [Track], the repeat play range  
changes to [Folder].  
p When [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to play back a subfolder of that  
folder.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within the cur-  
rently playing data session even if [Disc]  
is selected.  
2 Play tracks in a random order  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Playing a DVD-Video  
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.  
p AVIC-F700BT and AVIC-F7010BT cannot  
play DVDs.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
2
3
4
Reading the screen  
12 3 45  
7
8
6
5
6
7
a
9
8 9 ab  
1
Playback screen (page2)  
2
c
d
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Audio track indicator  
e
6
7
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-  
guage currently selected.  
3 Title number indicator  
f 9g b  
1
Shows the title number currently playing.  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).  
Playback screen (page3)  
2
5 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter currently playing.  
6 Subtitle language indicator  
Shows the subtitle language currently se-  
lected.  
7 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows the digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
8 Play time indicator  
h
i
j
k
6
7
8 9  
b
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
title.  
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
9 Viewing angle indicator  
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.  
a Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently  
selected.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
11  
Touching [m] or [n] to perform fast re-  
verse or forward.  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 73.  
3 Display the DVD menu  
If you keep touching [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n].  
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]  
or [TOP M.] while a disc is playing. Touching  
either of these keys again lets you start play-  
back from the location selected from the  
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-  
vided with the disc.  
f Specify the chapter you want to play back  
or the time to start playback by entering a  
number  
p For details, refer to Searching for a de-  
sired scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on the next page.  
g Perform the operation (such as resuming)  
stored in the disc  
4 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it again  
will skip to the previous chapter.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
When using a DVD that has a point recorded  
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-  
turns to the specified point and begins play  
back from that point.  
5 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between “playback”  
and “pause”.  
6 Switch the display  
h Change the subtitle language (Multi-sub-  
title)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the  
information plate as follows:  
i Change the viewing angle (Multi-angle)  
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-  
ing angles.  
Disc information display — Repeat range and  
L/R select display  
7 Displaying the map screen  
8 Display the DVD menu keypad  
= For details, refer to Using DVD menu by  
touch panel keys on page 73.  
p During playback of a scene shot from  
multiple angles, the angle icon  
is  
displayed. Turn the angle icon display  
on or off using the “DVD Setup” menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting the angle icon  
display on page 83.  
9 Switch next page of touch panel keys  
a Stop playback  
b Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
c Skip the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
j Change audio language and audio sys-  
tems (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio language and audio system.  
p DTS audio cannot be output, so select  
an audio setting other than DTS.  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch indicate the audio system re-  
corded on the DVD. Depending on the  
setting, playback may not be with the  
same audio system as that indicated.  
k Entering the numerical commands  
= For details, refer to Direct number search  
on the next page.  
d Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
back on page 73.  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
on page 73.  
e Fast reverse or forward  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
11  
Playing a DVD-Video  
2
Touch the keys to input the desired  
Resuming playback (Bookmark)  
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-  
back from a selected scene the next time the  
disc is loaded.  
number or time and then touch [Enter].  
Touching [B.Mark]:  
You can bookmark a point for every five discs.  
If you try to memorize a point for the same  
disc, the oldest bookmark will be overwritten  
by the newest one.  
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, keep  
touching [B.Mark] during playback.  
For titles, chapters  
Press and hold down EJECT button:  
You can also bookmark a point for one disc by  
pressing and holding down EJECT button. The  
next time you load the same disc, playback  
will resume from the bookmarked point. When  
you newly bookmark a point with this method,  
any previously bookmarked point(s) will be  
overwritten.  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
!
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
p For playback, the point bookmarked  
with this method is given priority over  
the point bookmarked by using  
p To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
[B.Mark].  
Direct number search  
You can use this function when you need to  
enter a numerical command during DVD play-  
back.  
Searching for a desired scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
1
Touch [0-9].  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
number.  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
Operating the DVD menu  
You can operate the DVD menu by touching  
the menu item on the screen directly.  
p Depending on the contents of DVD discs,  
this function may not work properly. In this  
case, use touch panel keys to operate the  
DVD menu.  
1
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
11  
2
Touch [TOP M.] or [Menu] to display  
1
Keep touching [r] until  
during playback.  
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion  
is displayed  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD  
menu.  
playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
3
Touch the desired menu item.  
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback  
Using DVD menu by touch panel keys  
speed during slow motion playback.  
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes  
the speed in four steps in the following order:  
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2  
If items on the DVD menu appears at the bot-  
tom of the screen, the touch panel keys may  
overlay them. In such case, select a item  
using those touch panel keys.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
1
Touch [a], [b], [c] or [d] to select the  
desired menu item.  
p Reversing slow motion playback is not pos-  
sible.  
Audio  
Subtitle  
Angle  
Play All  
Chapter  
Using the “Function” menu  
Staff / Cast  
1
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “DVD-V” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
tion disappears, touching anywhere and  
panel keys.  
touching  
displays them again.  
3
Touch [Func].  
2
Touch [Enter].  
Playback starts from the selected menu item.  
The way to display the menu differs depending  
on the disc.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
1
2
3
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
Title — Repeats just the current title  
Chapter — Repeats just the current  
chapter  
Disc — Plays throughout the current  
disc  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
!
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
11  
Playing a DVD-Video  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
2 Selecting audio output  
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM  
audio, you can switch the audio output.  
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-  
sired audio output appears in the display.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
!
L+R — Left and right  
L — Left  
R — Right  
L/R — Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Configure the DVD-  
Video/DVD-VR/DivX player. on page 82.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-VR  
12  
You can play a DVD-VR (DVD Video Recording  
Format) using the built-in drive of the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for DVD-VR.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
2
p AVIC-F700BT and AVIC-F7010BT cannot  
play DVD-VR.  
3
4
5
Reading the screen  
6
7
2
4 5  
1
3
7
8
6
8
9
9 a b c  
1
Playback screen (page2)  
2
d
e
1 Source icon  
f
g
Shows which source has been selected.  
h
7
8
2 Audio track indicator  
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
3 Title number indicator  
i a  
c
Shows the title number currently playing.  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).  
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
5 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter currently playing.  
6 Play mode indicator  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
Shows the current play mode.  
= For details, refer to Switching the play-  
back mode on page 77.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 78.  
7 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows the digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
8 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
title.  
9 Mixing condition indicator  
Shows the current mixing condition.  
3 c CM Back/CM Skip d  
= For details, refer to Using the short-  
time skip function on page 77.  
4 Switching the playback mode  
= For details, refer to Switching the play-  
back mode on page 77.  
5 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it again  
will skip to the previous chapter.  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Playing a DVD-VR  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n].  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
i Specify the chapter you want to play back  
or the time to start playback by entering a  
number  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between “playback”  
and “pause”.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a de-  
sired scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on this page.  
7 Switch the display  
Touching [Disp] changes the information as  
follows:  
Disc information display — Repeat range dis-  
play  
8 Displaying the map screen  
9 Display the title list  
Displays the title list recorded on the disc.  
a Switch next page of touch panel keys  
b Stop playback  
c Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
Searching for a desired scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
d Change audio language and audio sys-  
tems (Multi-audio)  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio language and audio system.  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch indicate the audio system re-  
corded on the DVD. Depending on the  
setting, playback may not be with the  
same audio system as that indicated.  
e Skip the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
2
Touch the keys to input the desired  
f Change the subtitle language (Multi-sub-  
title)  
number or time and then touch [Enter].  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
g Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
back on the next page.  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
on the next page.  
h Fast reverse or forward  
Touching [m] or [n] to perform fast re-  
verse or forward.  
If you keep touching [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
For titles, chapters  
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-VR  
12  
!
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
2
Touch the title to play from the list.  
order.  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
!
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
p To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
Switching the playback mode  
You have two methods for playing DVD-VR  
discs; Original (original) and Playlist (play-  
list).  
p Titles created with DVD recorders are  
called original. Those based on original, re-  
arranged titles are called playlist. Playlists  
are created on DVD-R/-RW discs.  
p Touching or switches the selection to  
the next or previous page in the list.  
3
To return to the previous screen, touch  
[List].  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
%
Touch [Mode Change] to switch the  
play mode.  
If the play mode is changed, playback starts  
from the beginning of the selected play mode.  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
Using the short-time skip function  
This function enables you to skip over your  
specified interval on the video playback. This  
is useful to skip commercials on your recorded  
DVD-VR disc.  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
%
To skip progressively backward or for-  
ward, touch [c CM Back] or [CM Skip d].  
Each touch of [c CM Back] or [CM Skip d]  
changes steps in the following order:  
c CM Back  
5 sec. — 15 sec. — 30 sec. — 1.0 min. —  
2.0 min. — 3.0 min.  
1
Keep touching [r] until  
during playback.  
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion  
is displayed  
playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]  
or [m], etc.  
CM Skip d  
30 sec. — 1.0 min. — 1.5 min. — 2.0 min. —  
3.0 min. — 5.0 min. — 10.0 min.  
2
Touch [r] to adjust playback speed  
during slow motion playback.  
Each touch of [r] changes the speed in four  
steps as below:  
Playing by selecting from the  
title list  
You can select and play a desired title from the  
list.  
1/16 d 1/8 d 1/4 d 1/2  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
1
Touch [List] on the playback screen.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
12  
Playing a DVD-VR  
p Reversing slow motion playback is not pos-  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
sible.  
= For details, refer to Configure the DVD-  
Video/DVD-VR/DivX player. on page 82.  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “DVD-VR” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
3
Touch [Func].  
Function menu  
1
2
3
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
Title — Repeats just the current title  
Chapter — Repeats just the current  
chapter  
!
Disc — Plays throughout the current  
disc  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
2 Selecting audio output  
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM  
audio, you can switch the audio output.  
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-  
sired audio output appears in the display.  
!
!
!
!
L+R — Left and right  
L — Left  
R — Right  
L/R — Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DivX  
13  
You can play a DivX using the built-in drive of  
the navigation system. This section describes  
that operations.  
p AVIC-F700BT and AVIC-F7010BT cannot  
play DivX files.  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page1)  
1
2
3
4
Reading the screen  
12  
3
45  
6 7  
8
5
6
7
9
8 9 a b  
1
Playback screen (page2)  
2
c
3
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Audio track indicator  
d
e
f
6
7
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
3 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).  
g 9  
b
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is not  
valid.  
5 File number indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing.  
6 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
7 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows the digital sound format (surround  
sound format) currently selected.  
8 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
title.  
9 Repeat range indicator  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 81.  
3 Select the previous or next folder  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired folder.  
4 Skip forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
Shows which repeat range has been  
selected.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
5 Playback and Pause  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
13  
Playing a DivX  
Touching [f] switches between “playback”  
and “pause”.  
6 Switch the information  
g Specify the chapter you want to play back  
or the time to start playback by entering a  
number  
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the  
information plate as follows:  
Disc information display — Current folder dis-  
play — File name display  
= For details, refer to Searching for a de-  
sired scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on this page.  
7 Displaying the map screen  
8 Switching the playing part  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types such, you can switch  
between media files types to play.  
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between  
the following media file types:  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during playback.  
%
Touch [r] during playback.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video files)  
p This touch panel key appears only when  
playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types.  
9 Switch next page of touch panel keys  
a Stop playback  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
b Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
c Change audio language and audio sys-  
tems (Multi-audio)  
%
Keep touching [r] until  
during playback.  
The icon is displayed, forward slow motion  
is displayed  
playback begins.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio language and audio system.  
d Change the subtitle language (Multi-sub-  
title)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages.  
e Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
or [m], etc.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversing slow motion playback is not pos-  
sible.  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
back on this page.  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
Searching for a desired scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing a folder or a file, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
possible when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
on this page.  
f Fast reverse or forward  
Touching [m] or [n] to perform fast re-  
verse or forward.  
If you keep touching [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n].  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DivX  
13  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Folder]  
3
Touch [Func].  
(folder), [File] (file), [Time] (time).  
Function menu  
1
2
2
Touch the keys to input the desired  
1 Repeating play  
number or time and then touch [Enter].  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
File — Repeat just the current file  
Folder — Repeat just the current folder  
Disc — Plays throughout the current  
disc  
p If you perform folder (file) search, fast  
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,  
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].  
2 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Configure the DVD-  
Video/DVD-VR/DivX player. on the next  
page.  
For folders, files  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
For time (time search)  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
!
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
p To cancel the input numbers, touch  
[Clear].  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “DivX” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Configure the DVD-Video/DVD-VR/DivX player.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
menu on this page.  
Displaying DVD Setup menu  
2
Touch [Language].  
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video,  
You can select the language preference of the  
subtitle, audio, and menus.  
DVD-VR or DivX.  
2
Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source” menu  
3
Touch the key next to [Subtitle Lan-  
to display the normal playback screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
guage], [Audio Language] or [Menu Lan-  
guage].  
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-  
rently set language is selected.  
3
Touch [Func].  
The“ Function” menu appears.  
4
Touch the desired language.  
4
Touch [DVD Setup].  
When you select [Others], a language code  
input display is shown. Input the four digit  
code of the desired language then touch  
[Enter].  
= Refer to Language code chart for DVDs on  
page 86.  
p If the selected language is not recorded on  
the disc, the default language specified on  
the disc is output and displayed.  
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio  
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]  
during playback.  
5
Touch the desired function.  
p Even if you use [S.Title] or [Audio] to  
switch the subtitle or audio language, this  
does not affect the settings here.  
Setting assist subtitles on  
or off  
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au-  
rally impaired. However, they are only dis-  
played if they are recorded on the DVD.  
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as de-  
sired.  
Setting the top-priority  
languages  
You can assign the top-priority language to the  
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial  
playback. If the selected language is recorded  
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-  
played or output in that language.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
menu on this page.  
2
Touch [Assist Subtitle].  
Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Setting the angle icon display  
14  
p Some discs do not enable changing of the  
TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-  
structions.  
You can set the angle icon  
to display in  
scenes where the angle can be switched.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
Setting the parental lock  
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental  
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot  
watch violent or adult oriented scenes. You  
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-  
sired.  
p When you set a parental lock level and then  
play a disc featuring parental lock, code  
number input indications may be dis-  
played. In this case, playback will begin  
when the correct code number is input.  
menu on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Multi Angle].  
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between  
[On] and [Off].  
Setting the aspect ratio  
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen  
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)  
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect  
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a  
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio  
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend  
use of this function only when you want to fit it  
to the rear display.)  
Setting the code number and level  
When you first use this function, register your  
code number. If you do not register a code  
number, parental lock will not operate.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
p When using a regular display, select either  
“Letter Box” or “Panscan”. Selecting  
“16:09” may result in an unnatural picture.  
menu on the previous page.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
2
3
4
Touch [Parental].  
Touch the key next to “Parental”.  
Touch [0] to [9] to input a four digit  
menu on the previous page.  
2
Touch [TV Aspect].  
code number.  
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
5
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
!
16:09 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-  
The code number is registered, and you can  
now set the level.  
played as it is (initial setting)  
!
Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of  
a letter box with black bands at the top and  
bottom of the screen  
Panscan — The picture is cut short at the  
right and left of the screen  
6
Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-  
sired level.  
The parental lock level is set.  
!
!
Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is  
p When playing discs that do not have a pan-  
scan system, the disc is played back with  
[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]  
setting. Confirm whether the disc package  
16 : 9 LB  
possible (initial setting)  
!
Level 7 to Level 2 — Playback of discs for  
children and non-adult oriented discs is  
possible  
bears the  
mark.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
!
Level 1 — Only playback of discs for chil-  
dren is possible  
cally and start playback from the first chapter  
of the first title.  
p If you want to change the parental level al-  
ready set, enter the registered code number  
and then select the parental level.  
p This function is available for DVD-Video.  
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If  
this function is not fully operable, turn this  
function off and start playback.  
p We recommend that you keep a record of  
your code number in case you forget it.  
p The parental lock level is recorded on the  
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the  
disc package, the included literature or the  
disc itself. With discs that do not feature a  
recorded parental lock level, you cannot  
use parental lock.  
p With some discs, parental lock operates to  
skip certain scenes only, after which normal  
playback resumes. For details, refer to the  
disc’s instructions.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
menu on page 82.  
2
Touch [Auto Play].  
Touching [Auto Play] switches this setting be-  
tween [On] and [Off].  
p When [Auto Play] is [On], repeat play can-  
not be used.  
p If you forget the registered code number,  
touch [Clear] 10 times on the number input  
screen. The registered code number is can-  
celed, letting you register a new one.  
®
Displaying your DivX VOD  
registration code  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this navigation system, you first  
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit  
to your provider.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
menu on page 82.  
2
Touch [DivX VOD].  
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.  
p Make a note of the code as you will need it  
when you register with a DivX VOD  
provider.  
Setting “Auto Play”  
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,  
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Setting the subtitle file for  
14  
®
DivX  
You can select whether to display DivX exter-  
nal subtitles or not.  
p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the  
original DivX subtitles are displayed even  
when [Custom] is selected.  
1
Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup  
menu on page 82.  
2
Touch [Subtitle File].  
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting  
between [Original] and [Custom].  
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on  
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,  
the line breaks and the characters are dis-  
played on the next line.  
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on  
one screen. If more than 126 characters are  
set, the excess characters will not be dis-  
played.  
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even  
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-  
responding subtitle files exist.  
p Up to three lines can be displayed at  
once.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
14  
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup  
Language code chart for DVDs  
Language (code), input code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
Spanish (es), 0519  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Language (code), input code  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Language (code), input code  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Rumanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Greek (el), 0512  
Sango (sg), 1907  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Shinghalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Belorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Czach (cs), 0319  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Thai (th), 2008  
Lithusnian (lt), 1220  
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tongan (to), 2015  
Turkish (tr), 2018  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Danish (da), 0401  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Polish (pl), 1612  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing the music file (USB, SD)  
15  
You can play the compressed audio files  
stored in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
Reading the screen  
12  
3
45  
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card, USB memory device and USB  
portable audio player are collectively re-  
ferred to as the “external storage device  
(USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB memory  
device and USB portable audio player only,  
they are referred to as the “USB storage de-  
vice”.  
6
7
8
9
a
b
p Optimum performance of this unit may not  
be obtained depending on the connected  
external storage device.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-  
rage device.  
Starting procedures  
%
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device to  
the USB connector.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start if there is a playable file on the external  
storage device.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
rage device on page 15.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card on page 14.  
p If the external storage device is already set,  
touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”  
menu.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
number. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-  
able files on folder 001 (root folder),  
playback starts from folder 002.)  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
3 Track number indicator  
4 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
track.  
5 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
6 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
7 Current file number and total number of  
files  
Shows the file number currently played and  
the total number of playable audio files.  
8 Track title indicator*  
Shows the title of the track currently playing  
(when available).  
9 Artist name indicator*  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
a Album title indicator*  
Shows the title of the album for the current  
track (when available).  
b Playback condition indicator  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
15  
Playing the music file (USB, SD)  
The marks shown below appears and indi-  
cates the current playback condition.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Music)  
: Repeat play  
1
2
: Random play  
: Scan play  
3
Indicator  
Implication  
4
5
6
All audio files in the current  
external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played repeat-  
edly. This is default condi-  
tion.  
Media Repeat  
7
Current folder is played re-  
peatedly.  
Folder Repeat  
Track Repeat  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
Current file is played repeat-  
edly.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
3 Switch the operation screen  
Touching the key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate movie files. This touch panel key is avail-  
able only when there are both audio and video  
file in the external storage device (USB, SD).  
4 Select the previous or next folder  
Touching [c] or [d] play the first playable file  
on the previous or next folder. The folders that  
there is no playable files are skipped.  
5 Skip forward or backward  
All audio files in the current  
external storage device  
(USB, SD) are played in ran-  
dom order.  
Media Random  
All audio files in the current  
folder are played in random  
order.  
Folder Random  
Media Scan  
The beginning of each audio  
file is played for about 10  
seconds.  
The beginning of each track  
in the current folder is  
played for about 10 seconds.  
Folder Scan  
= For more information, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
p The information marked with an asterisk (*)  
is displayed only when the information has  
been encoded on the compressed audio  
files. If specific information has not been  
encoded on the files, “—” is displayed in-  
stead.  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching [o] or [p] to perform fast  
rewind or forward.  
p There is no sound on fast rewind or for-  
ward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
7 Displaying the map screen  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing the music file (USB, SD)  
Selecting a track from the list  
15  
p If the characters recorded on the com-  
pressed audio file are not compatible with  
this navigation system, those characters  
may turn into garbled characters.  
The list lets you see the list of track titles or  
folder names on a external storage device  
(USB, SD). If you touch a folder on the list, you  
can view its contents. If you touch a track on  
the list, you can play the selected track.  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”  
menu to display the “USB” or “SD” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
2
Touch [Func].  
1
2
Touch [List].  
Touch the folder that you want to view.  
Touching or switches the selection to the  
next or previous page in the list.  
Touching  
folder.  
shows a content of the parent  
1
2
3
p If the selected folder does not contain any  
track that can be played, the track list is not  
displayed.  
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
Media — Repeat all compressed audio  
files in the selected external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD)  
3
Touch the track you want to play.  
p To cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].  
!
!
Track — Repeat just the current track  
Folder — Repeat the current folder  
Browsing embedded text  
information  
Text information recorded on an compressed  
audio file can be displayed.  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “Track”,  
the repeat play range changes to  
“Folder”.  
%
Touch  
.
2 Play tracks in a random order  
Random play lets you playback tracks in  
random order within the current repeat  
range.  
The next piece of information is displayed.  
!
!
!
!
!
Album Title : (album title)  
Track Title : (track title)  
Folder Title : (folder title)  
File Name : (file name)  
Artist Name : (artist name)  
Touching [Random] switches between “On”  
and “Off”.  
p If you turn [Random] to “On” while the  
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
p If the information has not been recorded on  
files, nothing may be displayed.  
p For WAV files, only the information marked  
with (*) can be displayed.  
3 Scan folders and tracks  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
15  
Playing the music file (USB, SD)  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each track. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
Touching [Scan] switches between “On”  
and “Off”. When you find the desired track  
touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.  
p After all tracks or folders scanning are  
finished, normal playback will begin  
again.  
p If you turn [Scan] to “On” while the re-  
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-  
peat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Playing the movie file (USB, SD)  
16  
You can play the video files stored in the exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD).  
p Optimum performance of this unit may not  
be obtained depending on the connected  
external storage device.  
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card, USB memory device and USB  
portable audio player are collectively re-  
ferred to as the “external storage device  
(USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB memory  
device and USB portable audio player only,  
they are referred to as the “USB storage de-  
vice”.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-  
rage device.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Folder number indicator  
3 File number indicator  
4 Play time indicator  
Starting procedures  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
track.  
5 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
6 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
%
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device to  
the USB connector.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start if there is a playable file on the external  
storage device.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
rage device on page 15.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card on page 14.  
p If the external storage device is already set,  
touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”  
menu.  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
number. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-  
able files on folder 001 (root folder),  
playback starts from folder 002.)  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Video)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 a  
Reading the screen  
45  
12  
3
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
6
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
3 Switch the operation screen  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
16  
Playing the movie file (USB, SD)  
Touching the key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate movie files. This touch panel key is avail-  
able only when there are both audio and video  
file in the external storage device (USB, SD).  
4 Select the previous or next folder  
Touching [c] or [d] play the first playable file  
on the previous or next folder. The folders that  
there is no playable files are skipped.  
5 Skip forward or backward  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Folder],  
[File] or [Time].  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching again will skip to the  
previous file.  
2
Touch the keys to input the desired  
number or time and then touch [Enter].  
Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching [o] or [p] to perform fast  
rewind or forward.  
p There is no sound on fast rewind or for-  
ward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
For folders, files  
7 Displaying the map screen  
8 Specify the chapter you want to play back  
or the time to start playback by entering a  
number  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
For time (time search)  
= For details, refer to Searching for a de-  
sired scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on this page.  
!
To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],  
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.  
!
9 Stop playback  
a Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
p To clear the input numbers, touch  
[Clear].  
Using the “Function” menu  
Searching for a desired scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing a folder number, file number or the time.  
1
Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”  
menu to display the “USB” or “SD” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Playing the movie file (USB, SD)  
16  
3
Touch [Func].  
p If the touch panel keys are not shown,  
touching anywhere to display them.  
1
1 Repeating play  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
Media — Repeat all video files in the se-  
lected external storage device (USB, SD)  
File — Repeat just the current file  
!
!
Folder — Repeat the current folder  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “Track”,  
the repeat play range changes to  
“Folder”.  
93  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
®
17  
Using the iPod (iPod)  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
Video  
1
p For connection, USB interface cable for  
iPod (CD-IU230V) (sold separately) is re-  
quired.  
a
p USB interface cable for iPod is supplied  
with AVIC-F90BT.  
p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Shuffle play indicator  
Appears when the shuffle play is activated.  
3 Repeat play indicator  
Starting procedures  
1
Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV Settings”  
menu to select the “iPod”.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
(AV1) on page 143.  
Appears when the repeat play is activated.  
: All-tracks repeat  
: One-track repeat  
4 Album artwork  
2
Connect your iPod.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
Album art of the current song is displayed if it  
is available.  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
page 16.  
p If the iPod is already connected, touch  
[iPod] on the “AV Source” menu.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
5 Song title (episode) indicator  
Shows the title of the current song. When the  
podcast is played, the episode is displayed.  
6 Artist name (podcast title) indicator  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
When the podcast is played, the podcast title  
is displayed.  
7 Album title (release date) indicator  
Shows the title of the album for the song.  
When the podcast is played, the release date  
is displayed.  
Reading the screen  
Music  
1
23  
8 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current  
song.  
9 Song number indicator  
4
Shows the number of the song currently play-  
ing and total number of songs in the selected  
list.  
5
6
7
a Chapter number indicator  
Shows the current chapter number and total  
number of chapters when the video with chap-  
ters played.  
8
9
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
®
Using the iPod (iPod)  
17  
Touching the key displays the top category be-  
fore you use the category tabs. If you select  
the song using the category tabs to play,  
touching the key displays the previous list.  
7 Skip back or forward to another song  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
song. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current song. Touching again will skip  
to the previous song. When the track with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
p If the characters recorded on the iPod are  
not compatible with this navigation system,  
those characters may turn into garbled  
characters.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Music)  
1
2
3
4
Fast rewind or forward  
5
Keep touching [o] or [p] to perform fast  
rewind or forward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
6
7
8
9
8 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
a
9 Displaying the map screen  
a Shuffle All  
1 Album artwork  
Touch the key to enlarge the album artwork. If  
you touch again, the artwork returns to a nor-  
mal size.  
All songs (except for the track in “Audiobook-  
s”and “Podcasts”) in your iPod can be played  
randomly.  
p To cancel the random play, switch  
[Shuffle] on the “Function” menu to the  
“Off” .  
2 Category tabs  
Shows the list to narrow down the songs. If  
you want to use the list of “Audiobooks”or  
“Composers”, touch [Menu] to display the  
lists.  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
Browsing for a song  
Touching the item on list allows you to search  
for a song and play it in your iPod.  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
4 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 98.  
5 Switch the operation screen  
Touching the key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate movie files. After touching the key, the top  
category menu appears to let you select the  
item for playback.  
Narrowing down a song with the list  
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-  
play the song or track list.  
!
!
!
!
!
Playlists (playlists)  
Genres (genres)  
Artists (artists)  
Albums (albums)  
Podcasts (podcasts)  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
The search screen is displayed.  
6 Display the top category menu  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
®
17  
Using the iPod (iPod)  
Search control  
2
Touching or switches the selection  
1
Touch your desired category tab to dis-  
to the next or previous page in the list.  
play the list.  
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
2
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Refine the item until the track title is displayed  
on the list.  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.  
p “THE” or “The” and space at the beginning  
of the artist name will be ignored and the  
next character will be taken into account  
for searching.  
p Touching [All] on the list includes all op-  
tions in the current list. For example, if you  
touch [All] after touching [Artists], you can  
proceed to next screen with selecting all ar-  
tists in the list.  
p After you select Artists, Albums, or  
Genres, continued touching one of the list  
allows you to start playing the first songs in  
the selected list and display the next op-  
tions.  
4
Touch the character key to display the  
page includes applicable options.  
5
On the song (or episode) list, touch the  
track you want to play.  
4
On the song (or episode) list, touch the  
track you want to play.  
Starting the video playback  
This navigation system can play video if an  
iPod with video capabilities is connected.  
p After you select the track using this func-  
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-  
viously selected.  
1
2
Touch [Video].  
Searching for applicable items by  
alphabet  
Touch one of the categories in that con-  
tains the video you want to play.  
Using the search control displays the page in-  
cludes the first applicable option.  
p This function is available for the alphabeti-  
cal list only.  
Video playback will start.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
®
Using the iPod (iPod)  
17  
If you select the video from the list to play  
after touching Top Menu, touching the key  
displays the previous list. (If you touch Top  
Menu again but do not select a video, this key  
is disabled until you select a video with the list  
next time.)  
3
Touch your desired item on the list to  
narrow down them until the video list ap-  
pears.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Browsing for a video on this page.  
4
On the video list, touch the video you  
5 Skip back or forward to another song  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current video. Touching again will skip  
to the previous video. When the video with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
want to play.  
5
Touch the screen to display to touch  
panel keys.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Using the touch panel keys (Video) on this  
page.  
Fast rewind or forward  
Keep touching [o] or [p] to perform fast  
rewind or forward.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
Using the touch panel keys  
(Video)  
1
2
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
3
7 Displaying the map screen  
8 Display the top category menu for video  
Touching the key displays the top category for  
video playback.  
9 Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
Browsing for a video  
Touching the item on list allows you to search  
for a video and play it in your iPod.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
3 Switch the operation screen  
Touching the key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate movie files. After touching the key, the top  
category menu appears to let you select the  
item for playback.  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
4 Display the previous selected list  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
®
17  
Using the iPod (iPod)  
Narrowing down a video with the list  
1
Touch your desired category.  
Search control  
1
2
3
Touch your desired category.  
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
2
Touching or switches the selection  
to the next or previous page in the list.  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the character.  
p “THE” or “The” and space at the beginning  
of the artist name will be ignored and the  
next character will be taken into account  
for searching.  
3
Touch the item that you want to refine.  
Refine the item until the track title is displayed  
on the list.  
p Touching [All] on the list includes all op-  
tions in the current list. For example, if you  
touch [All] after touching [Music Videos],  
you can proceed to next screen with select-  
ing all artists in the list.  
4
Touch the character key to display the  
page includes applicable options.  
5
On the video list, touch the video you  
want to play.  
4
On the video list, touch the video you  
want to play.  
p After you select the video using this func-  
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-  
viously selected.  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [iPod] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the control screen for “iPod”.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
Searching for applicable items by  
alphabet  
Using the search control displays the page in-  
cludes the first applicable option.  
p This function is available for the alphabeti-  
cal list only.  
2
Touch [Func].  
1
2
3
4
1 Setting the repeat play  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
®
Using the iPod (iPod)  
17  
There are two repeat play types for the play-  
back.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
One — Repeats just the current track  
All — Repeats all tracks in the selected  
list  
2 Setting the shuffle play for music  
This function shuffles songs or albums and  
plays them in random order.  
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
Off — Does not shuffle.  
Songs — Play back songs in random  
order within the selected list  
Albums — Select an album randomly,  
and then play back all songs in that  
album in order  
!
3 Setting the audiobook play speed  
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,  
playback speed can be changed.  
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the  
settings as follows:  
!
!
Normal — Playback in normal speed  
Slower — Playback slower than normal  
speed  
!
Faster — Playback faster than normal  
speed  
4 Playback the video on the wide screen  
mode  
If the video is compatible with wide screen  
format, set [Widescreen] to [On] in order to  
view the video image in the wide screen.  
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the  
settings as follows:  
!
On — Outputs the wide-screen video  
from iPod  
!
Off — Outputs the normal-sized video  
from iPod  
p Display size is changed after you  
change “Widescreen” setting and select  
the video to play.  
p This setting is available only during the  
video operation.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
18  
Using the radio (FM)  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (FM).  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
%
Touch [FM] on the “AV Source” menu to  
display the “FM” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
3
4
5
6
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
3 Select a preset channel  
5
6
[c] or [d] can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
4 Perform manual tuning  
7
To perform manual tuning, touch [c] or [d]  
briefly. The frequencies move up or down one  
step at a time.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1  
to FM3.  
3 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 Frequency indicator  
5 LOCAL indicator  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
6 STEREO indicator  
Shows that the frequency selected is being  
broadcast in stereo.  
7 Signal level indicator  
Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, keep touching [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d], you can  
skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek  
tuning will start as soon as you release  
the keys.  
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
5 Select an FM band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM  
band is displayed, FM1, FM2 or FM3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
6 Displaying the map screen  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
18  
p Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three  
FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored  
in memory.  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [FM] on the “AV Source” menu to  
display the “FM” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detailed information display or preset list  
display.  
2
Touch [Func].  
1
2
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to this page.  
2 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
Preset tuning keys  
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, keep touching a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
1
Touch [BSM].  
101  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
18  
Using the radio (FM)  
2
Touch [Start] to start “BSM”.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [Local].  
2
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
3
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.  
Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4  
p The level “4” setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)  
19  
a Detailed information  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for HD Radio™.  
= For details, refer to Switching the display  
on the next page.  
p For details concerning operation, refer to  
the HD Radio tuner’s operation manual.  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [Digital Radio] on the “AV  
Source” menu to display the “Digital  
Radio” screen.  
1
2
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
3
4
Reading the screen  
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
3 Select a preset channel  
6
7
8
9
a
[c] or [d] can be used to switch presets chan-  
nels.  
1 Source icon  
4 Perform manual tuning  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
To perform manual tuning, touch [c] or [d]  
briefly. The frequencies move up or down one  
step at a time.  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,  
FM2, FM3 or AM.  
Perform seek tuning  
3 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 Frequency indicator  
To perform seek tuning, keep touching [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
5 Multicasting indicator  
Shows the number of multicast channels in  
the current frequency.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d], you can  
skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek  
tuning will start as soon as you release  
the keys.  
6 Signal level indicator  
7 Blending mode indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the re-  
ception mode on page 105.  
8 Signal type indicator  
Shows the type of signal currently being re-  
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,  
“D” appears. Otherwise, “A” appears.  
9 Seek type indicator  
5 Select a band  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
band is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
6 Displaying the map screen  
= For details, refer to Switching the seek  
mode on page 105.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
19  
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
Switching the display  
Desired information can be displayed.  
%
Touch [Disp].  
Touch [Disp] repeatedly to switch between the  
following settings:  
Call sign or frequency — Artist name — Song  
title — Program type  
%
Touch [List] (or [Detail]).  
p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to  
an HD Radio broadcasting, display can be  
changed.  
p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD  
Radio broadcasting, default display is chan-  
ged into station name instead of  
frequency.  
Each touch of [List] (or [Detail]) changes the  
detailed information display or preset list dis-  
play.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [Digital Radio] on the “AV  
Source” menu to display the “Digital  
Radio” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
2
Touch [Func].  
Preset tuning keys  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
want to store in memory, keep touching a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
1
2
3
4
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)  
19  
2 Switching the seek mode  
= For details, refer to this page.  
3 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to this page.  
4 Switching the reception mode  
= For details, refer to this page.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and  
two levels for AM:  
FM: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4  
AM: 1 — 2  
p The FM “4” (AM “2”) setting allows recep-  
tion of only the strongest stations, while  
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-  
tions.  
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
Switching the reception mode  
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets  
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the  
analog broadcast of the same frequency level  
in default. If you want to prevent a frequent  
automatic switching, switch this setting to  
[Analog].  
%
Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-  
tion mode.  
Switching the seek mode  
You can select the method of seek tuning.  
!
!
[Analog]:  
Receives analog broadcasting only.  
[Digital-Analog auto]:  
%
Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-  
Automatically switches to the analog broad-  
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-  
tal broadcast.  
ting.  
!
[All]:  
Seeks stations from both analog and digital  
broadcasting.  
[HD]:  
p If you select “Analog” on this setting while  
[Seek] is set to “HD”, the setting on [Seek]  
turns to “All” automatically.  
!
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.  
p If you select “HD” on this setting while  
[Blending] is set to “Analog”, the setting  
on [Blending] turns to “Digital-Analog  
auto” automatically.  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
20  
Using the radio (AM)  
You can listen to the radio by using this navi-  
gation system. This section describes opera-  
tions for radio (AM).  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
3 Select a preset channel  
c or d can be used to switch presets.  
4 Perform manual tuning  
%
Touch [AM] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “AM” screen.  
To perform manual tuning, touch [c] or [d]  
briefly. The frequencies move up or down one  
step at a time.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
Perform seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, keep touching [c] or  
[d] for about one second and release. The  
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [c] or [d] briefly.  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d], you can  
skip broadcasting frequencies. Seek  
tuning will start as soon as you release  
the keys.  
4
5
p Moving MULTI-CONTROL left or right  
enables you to perform the equivalent  
operations.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
3 Frequency indicator  
4 Signal level indicator  
5 LOCAL indicator  
5 Displaying the map screen  
Switching between the  
detailed information display  
and the preset list display  
You can switch the left side of the basic screen  
according to your preference.  
Shows when local seek tuning is on.  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
4
5
%
Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).  
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes  
the detailed information display or preset list  
display.  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
2 Displaying the “Function” menu  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
20  
2
Touch [Func].  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
1
2
1 Storing the strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies  
= For details, refer to this page.  
2 Tuning in strong signals  
= For details, refer to this page.  
Preset tuning keys  
1
When you find a frequency that you  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
“BSM” (best stations memory) lets you auto-  
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
want to store in memory, keep touching a  
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-  
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
2
The next time you touch the same pre-  
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p You can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio  
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]  
to [P6].  
%
Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.  
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
Using the “Function” menu  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved by using [P1] to [P6].  
1
Touch [AM] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “AM” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
20  
Using the radio (AM)  
2
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.  
Level: 1 — 2  
p The level “2” setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
21  
You can use the navigation system to control  
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-  
parately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section  
provides information on XM operations with  
the navigation system which differs from that  
described in the XM tuner’s operation man-  
ual.  
About the logo for channel name  
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-  
vigation system can be displayed for each  
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-  
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.  
When no logo may be displayed, the following  
substitute icon is displayed.  
Substitute icon  
Following XM satellite digital tuner units can-  
not be connected:  
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 XM band indicator  
Shows the XM band that has been selected.  
3 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 XM channel number indicator  
Shows the XM channel number the tuner is  
currently tuned to.  
Reading the screen  
ALL CH MODE  
1
2
3
4
5
5 XM channel category  
6
7
Shows the category of broadcast channel.  
6 XM channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in ALL CH MODE, and select a  
channel from selected category in  
CATEGORY MODE.  
8
9
7 XM station name logo  
CATEGORY MODE  
p The message “ON THE AIR” disappears  
if the navigation system cannot receive  
XM tuner reception for some reason.  
8 XM station name indicator  
Shows the XM broadcast station name the  
tuner is currently tuned in.  
5
9 Detail information  
Shows the detailed information of the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [XM] on the “AV Source” menu  
to display the “XM” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
21  
Using the XM tuner  
8 Preset key for receiving the traffic  
audio service  
ALL CH MODE  
1
2
3
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic  
announcement function on page 112.  
9 Switching the XM channel select mode  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the chan-  
nel.  
4
5
ALL CH MODE:  
6
7
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
CATEGORY MODE:  
89 a  
1
b
2
You can select a channel within a selected  
category that you operate this function.  
a Selecting an XM channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting an XM chan-  
nel directly on this page.  
CATEGORY MODE  
3
c
5
b Switching to the list display  
You can select the desired channel from the  
list display.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
from the list on the next page.  
6
7
c Switching the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
89 a  
b
1 Memorize the current song  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
on the next page.  
2 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
Selecting an XM channel directly  
You can select an XM channel directly by en-  
tering the desired channel number.  
3 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the “Function”  
menu on page 112.  
4 Recalling channels from the preset  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
5 Perform manual tuning  
The channels move up or down one at a  
time.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The XM channel that was entered is selected.  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can  
skip the broadcasting channels.  
6 Select an XM band  
4
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
XM band is displayed: XM 1, XM 2 or  
XM 3. This is useful for switching the preset  
item.  
Displaying the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
7 Displaying the map screen  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
21  
1
2
Touch [Direct].  
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-  
lows:  
Detail information display or Preset list  
display — CH name list (Channel name) —  
Song title list (Song title) — Artist name list  
(Artist name)  
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
2
Touch the desired channel that you  
want to listen to.  
With a you touch of any of the preset tuning  
keys ([P1] to [P6]), you can easily store up to  
six broadcast channels for later recall (also  
with the touch of a key).  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
Touch or to switch to the next page or pre-  
vious page.  
to [P6].  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key [P1] to [P6] the station is recalled from  
memory.  
p During CATEGORY MODE, touch [c] or  
[d] to switch to another category.  
p When the list switching operation is started  
from the detailed information display, the  
preset list appears in the end of the list se-  
lection.  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM  
bands can be stored in memory.  
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-  
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-  
ing the “ALL CH MODE”.  
Using “My Mix” function  
“My Mix” function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-  
orized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the  
song title and the artist name are memor-  
ized.  
Selecting a channel from the list  
The list content can be switched so you can  
search for the track you want to listen to not  
only by the channel name but also by the artist  
name or song title.  
p The channel list shows all channels during  
ALL CH MODE, and the channels included  
in the selected category during  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
CATEGORY MODE. To switch the channel  
mode, touch [Mode].  
are listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.  
1
Touch [List].  
XM channel list appears in the display.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
21  
Using the XM tuner  
%
Touch [Memo].  
Memorizing an “Instant Traffic &  
Weather” channel  
The song title and artist name of current song  
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-  
firmation message appears.  
1
Tune into “Instant Traffic & Weather”  
channel.  
p The song title and artist name of up to 12  
songs can be memorized. Trying to save  
more than 12 songs will result in older ones  
being overwritten.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
2
Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-  
onds or more.  
That “Instant Traffic & Weather” channel will  
be memorized.  
p Even if you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner together, only one station can be  
memorized. The station memorized after-  
ward will overwrite the existing one.  
p This function is invalid for the channel  
“000”.  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly depending on the conditions.  
p You can customize the setting for the mem-  
orized songs later.  
Tuning in to the memorized channel  
%
Touch [TRAFFIC].  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [TRAFFIC] on the “AV Source”  
menu.  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
tion, refer to Setting the memorized  
songs on the next page.  
p You can even call up a “Instant Traffic &  
Weather” channel from a source other than  
the XM source.  
p To cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC  
Off] on the screen.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
p If the memorized song is not checked or  
when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on  
“MEMO Edit” screen, no alert will be pro-  
vided.  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [XM] on the “AV Source” menu  
= Refer to Setting the memorized songs  
on the next page.  
to display the “XM” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the status of the Navigation System.  
p If there is even a slight difference between  
the memorized title and the title of the  
song being broadcast, no notification will  
be provided even though they are the same  
song.  
2
Touch [Func].  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to the memorized “Instant Traf-  
fic & Weather” channel by directly calling it up  
with [TRAFFIC]. (Only one station can be  
memorized.)  
1
1 Setting the memorized songs  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
21  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix  
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can  
change the notification setting when the song  
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable  
notification for each song.  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch the song title that you want to  
exclude from the notification list.  
The check mark is removed, and the song title  
is excluded from the notification list.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
Touch to toggle the selection.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
songs from the song title list.  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch and hold the song you want to  
delete.  
p To delete all songs that are memorized,  
touch [Delete All].  
3
Touch [Yes].  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
4 SIRIUS channel number indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the  
tuner is tuned to.  
5 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in All Ch Mode, and select a chan-  
nel from the selected category in  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
Pioneer Sirius satellite digital tuner, which is  
sold separately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-  
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-  
tions with navigation system which differs  
from that described in the SIRIUS tuner’s op-  
eration manual.  
Category Mode.  
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation  
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is  
required. For details concerning operation,  
refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-  
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect  
universal tuner.  
= For details, refer to Switch the SIRIUS  
channel select mode on the next page.  
6 SIRIUS station name logo  
p The message “ON THE AIR” disappears  
if the navigation system cannot receive  
SIRIUS tuner reception for some reason.  
7 Variable information area  
Shows various information about the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
= For more details about the displayed in-  
formation, refer to Switch the SIRIUS  
display on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
All Ch Mode  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch [SIRIUS] on the “AV Source”  
menu to display the “SIRIUS” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
7
All Ch Mode  
Category Mode  
1 2  
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Source icon  
9a b  
c
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 SIRIUS band indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-  
lected.  
3 Preset number indicator  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
22  
a Switch the SIRIUS channel select  
mode  
Category Mode  
1 2  
3
4
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the chan-  
nel.  
d
6
All Ch Mode:  
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
Category Mode:  
7
8
You can select a channel within a selected  
category that you operate this function.  
b Select a SIRIUS channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS  
channel directly on this page.  
c Switch the SIRIUS display  
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display  
information.  
Channel number — Channel name —  
Channel category — Artist name/feature —  
Song/program title — Composer  
d Switch the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
9a b  
c
1 Memorize the current song  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
on the next page.  
2 Switch the SIRIUS Instant replay mode  
= For details, refer to Using the “Instant  
Replay” function on page 117.  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
4 Displaying the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the “Function”  
menu on page 117.  
5 Recalling channels from the preset  
Touch to recall the preset channel.  
Storing broadcast stations  
You can register the channel currently  
being broadcast to the preset list.  
6 Perform manual tuning  
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly  
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by  
entering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
The channels move up or down one at a  
time.  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].  
p If you keep touching [c] or [d] you can  
skip the broadcasting channels.  
7 Select a SIRIUS band  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-  
lected.  
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired  
SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,  
SIRIUS 2, or SIRIUS 3. This is useful for  
switching the preset.  
4
Touch  
.
8 Displaying the map screen  
9 Preset key for receiving the traffic  
audio service  
You return to the previous display.  
= For details, refer to Using the direct traffic  
announcement function on the next  
page.  
Display the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
1
2
Touch [Direct].  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
%
Touch [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-  
mation message appears.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be  
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys  
[P1] to [P6], you can easily store up to six  
broadcast stations for later recall (also with  
the touch of a key).  
memorized.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name of channel “000”.  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
2
3
Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
to [P6].  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
p If the alert for the song is “Off” or [Alert  
Off] is selected, no notification will be pro-  
vided even when that song is broadcast.  
= For details, refer to Setting the memor-  
ized songs on page 118.  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you touch the same preset tun-  
ing key [P1] to [P6] the station is recalled from  
memory.  
p Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS  
bands can be stored in memory.  
p You can also touch [c] or [d] to recall sta-  
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1] to  
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-  
ing “All Ch Mode”.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-  
tem.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the songs  
to alert on page 118.  
p If there is even a slight difference between  
the memorized title and the title of the  
track being broadcast, no notification will  
be provided even though they are the same  
song.  
Using “My Mix” function  
The MyMix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-  
ized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only  
the song title and the artist name are mem-  
orized.  
Using the direct traffic  
announcement function  
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel  
by directly calling it up with the [TRAFFIC]  
(Only one station can be memorized).  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
22  
Memorizing an traffic channel  
[p] and hold  
Fast-forwards.  
1
Tune in to a traffic channel.  
Touching [f] switches between  
playback and pause.  
[f]  
2
Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-  
onds or more.  
p During “Instant Replay” mode, each touch  
of [Disp] changes the display information  
as follows;  
The traffic channel will be memorized.  
p Even if you use this with the XM satellite  
radio tuner, only one station can be memor-  
ized. The station memorized afterward will  
overwrite the existing one.  
Time position — Channel number — Chan-  
nel name — Channel category — Artist  
name/feature — Song/program title —  
Composer  
p The channels 000 can not be memorized.  
p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the  
beginning of stored data.  
Tuning in to the memorized channel  
%
Touch [TRAFFIC].  
p You can also perform this operation by  
touching [TRAFFIC] on the “AV Source”  
menu.  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Touch [SIRIUS] on the “AV Source”  
p To cancel a traffic announcement, touch  
[TRFC Off].  
menu to display the “SIRIUS” screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
Using the “Instant Replay” function  
2
Touch [Func].  
The “Instant Replay” function allows you to  
replay the stored broadcast on the SIRIUS  
tuner (if the tuner capable for this function).  
As soon as you tune to a channel, the SIRIUS  
tuner automatically begins storing the broad-  
cast. It can store approximately up to 44 min-  
utes previous (depending on the selected  
channel and the memory capacity of con-  
nected tuner).  
1
2
3
1
Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS  
screen to activate the “Instant Replay”  
mode.  
1 Setting the memorized songs  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
2 Using the Game Alert function  
= For details, refer to the next page.  
3 Displaying Game Information  
= For details, refer to page 119.  
2
Touch keys for “Instant Replay”.  
Return to the start of the current  
song or program. Touching again  
will skip back to the previous song  
or program.  
[o]  
[o] and hold  
[p]  
Fast reverses.  
Forwards play to the next song or  
program  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
22  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
3
Touch [Delete] when the song you  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
Display the song title list memorized for the  
MyMix Function (MyMix list). You can change  
the setting of the notification when the song is  
broadcast again. You can enable or disable no-  
tification for each song.  
want to delete is displayed.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
4
Touch [Yes].  
Using the Game Alert function  
Selecting teams for Game Alert  
1
Touch [Memo].  
This navigation system can alert you when  
games involving your favorite sports teams are  
about to start. To use this function you need to  
store the teams you want to follow in advance.  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
desired song.  
3
Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.  
When the alert for the song is activated, [ON]  
appears at the beginning of the selected title.  
p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].  
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
league.  
Changing the alert setting  
3
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
team.  
4
Touch [On/Off].  
The team displayed as [ON] is the alert target.  
p When the selected team is excluded from  
the alert target, the team is displayed as  
[OFF]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.  
When you have already made 12 team se-  
lections, “FULL” is displayed and additional  
team selection is not possible. In this case,  
first delete the team selection and then try  
again.  
1
2
Touch [Memo].  
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
tracks from the song title list.  
1
Touch [Memo].  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
song title that you want to delete.  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
22  
5
Touch [Alert On].  
2
Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game  
score information which is registered.  
p The game score will be updated automati-  
cally.  
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel  
that broadcasts the displayed game.  
p If you have not made any team selections,  
“Not Set” is displayed.  
p When no games involving your favorite  
teams are currently being played  
“NO GAME” is displayed.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable the alert for selected  
items. This function is useful when to want to  
turn the alert off temporarily without changing  
the setting of each selected team.  
1
2
Touch [Game Alert].  
Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].  
p Touch to toggle the selection.  
When a game involving one of your  
teams is broadcast  
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to  
switch the station, and you can view the game  
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel  
does not switch.  
p Alerts may not be provided depending on  
the status of the navigation system.  
Displaying Game Information  
An alert will be displayed when a game with  
the team you selected is about to start (or is  
currently under way). You can also display  
game information and changes to the broad-  
cast channel.  
p The Game Information function is available  
when [Alert] is [On] in “Game Alert”.  
1
Touch [Game Info].  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
23  
Using the AV input  
You can display “video image” output by AV1  
Input or AV2 Input to the screen of the navi-  
gation system. For details of the connection  
method, refer to “Installation Manual”.  
Using the touch panel keys  
%
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
1
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, video images cannot be  
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view  
video images, you must stop in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
Using the AV1  
You can display “video image” output by the  
2
3
equipment connected to “AV1 Input”.  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
1
Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
2 Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel  
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to  
display the touch panel keys again.  
3 Displaying the map screen  
(AV1) on page 143.  
2
Touch [AV1] on the “AV Source” menu.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
Using the AV2  
You can display “video image” output by the  
equipment connected to “AV2 Input”.  
1
Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 2  
(AV2) on page 143.  
2
Touch [AV2] on the “AV Source” menu.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
24  
The term “external unit” refers to future  
Using the touch panel keys  
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned  
for, or to devices that allow control of basic  
functions although they are not fully con-  
trolled by the navigation system. Two external  
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-  
tem. When two external units are connected,  
the navigation system allocates them as exter-  
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.  
%
Touch [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the “AV  
Source” menu to select the external unit.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
1
2
For details of the connection method, refer to  
“Installation Manual”.  
3
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
external unit’s operation manual. This section  
provides information on external unit opera-  
tions with the navigation system that differ  
from those described in the external unit’s op-  
eration manual.  
4
5
6
7
p Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-  
nal unit may not respond.)  
1 Send a band command  
Touch to send a band command to the ex-  
ternal unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the  
external unit may not respond.)  
2 Recalls equalizer curves  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
= For details, refer to Recalling equalizer  
curves on page 140.  
3 Send an [a], [b], [c], or [d] command  
Touch to operate the external unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
4 Switching the automatic and manual  
function  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 External unit indicator  
You can turn automatic and manual func-  
tion on or off.  
You can switch between Auto and Manual  
functions of the external unit connected.  
Initially, this function is set to Auto.  
p Operating commands set for Auto and  
Manual operations vary depending on  
the external unit connected.  
Displays the information that send by con-  
nected external units.  
3 Auto/Manual mode indicator  
Shows the current mode.  
5 Displaying the map screen  
6 Send a 1 key to 6 key command  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
The external unit can be operated by trans-  
mitting the operating commands set to 1  
key — 6 key.  
p Operation varies depending on the exter-  
nal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
7 Operate the external unit by using F1 —  
F4  
The external unit can be operated by trans-  
mitting the operating commands set to F1  
— F4.  
p The operating commands set to F1 —  
F4 vary depending on the external unit.  
p Some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
4
Use the tool assigned to the desired op-  
The options in the “Navi  
Settings” menu  
tion to change the settings.  
1
Basic operations in the “Navi  
Settings” menu  
Preferences related to the navigation functions  
can be set.  
A method for changing the volume setting for  
the navigation guidance and beep is described  
here, along with an operational example.  
1
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
Menu”, and then touch [Settings].  
2
3
2
Touch [Navi Settings].  
1 Slider  
Touching the desired point on the bar or  
dragging the slider to the desired point al-  
lows you to change the value.  
2 Detailed setup key  
Displays the screen for setting the prefer-  
ences in detail.  
3 On-off control  
Touching [On] or [Off] enables activation or  
deactivation of this function.  
5
Touch  
to return to the “Navi Set-  
The “Navi Settings” menu appears.  
Touch [Sound settings].  
tings” menu.  
3
GPS & Time Settings  
Indicates the connection status of the GPS an-  
tenna, its reception sensitivity, and from how  
many satellites the signal is being received.  
%
Touch [GPS & Time Settings] on the  
“Navi Settings” menu.  
The “GPS Status” screen appears.  
The “Sound settings” menu appears.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
1
2
3
Time Settings  
The “Time Settings” screen provides you to  
set the time manually.  
1
Touch [GPS & Time Settings] on the  
“Navi Settings” menu.  
The “GPS Status” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Time Settings].  
The “Time Settings” screen appears.  
4
5
1 Positions of the GPS constellation being re-  
ceived by the navigation system  
Signal com-  
munication  
Used in posi-  
tioning  
Color  
Green  
Gray  
Red  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Available options;  
!
“Auto Correction”  
2 Shows the current comprehensive accu-  
racy, altitude and speed.  
3 Shows each satellite’s signal strength.  
4 Shows the connection status or reception  
condition of GPS antenna.  
Synchronizes the internal clock of this navi-  
gation system with the accurate time trans-  
mitted from GPS (GMT). Changing this  
preference allows you to set the time manu-  
ally.  
Color  
Condition  
3D reception (Normal positional  
accuracy)  
CAUTION  
Turning “Auto Correction” to “Off” dis-  
Green  
ables the automatic change to the appropri-  
ate time zone. Note that the proper route  
may not be calculated if the time you set  
does not match the time zone of the area  
that your route passes through.  
2D reception (lower positional ac-  
curacy)  
Yellow  
Red  
Connected and no reception  
No connection  
Black  
with x  
[On]:  
Corrects the current time by changing the  
time zone automatically according to this  
system’s whereabouts.  
5 Shows the GPS reception status. A blinking  
green lamp indicates whether positioning is  
works normally. If the lamp lights up in an-  
other color, there is a problem related with  
GPS reception. In such case, check whether  
the connection and installation are correct.  
[Off]:  
Corrects the current time according to the  
settings on “Time Zone” and “Time”.  
“Time Zone”  
!
Enables you to set the time zone manually.  
Touch the key to show the list and then  
touch the current time zone.  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
!
“Time”  
Map Settings  
The general settings related with a map screen  
can be customized.  
Enables you to adjust the time difference by  
one hour. Touch a or b to adjust it.  
p “Time Zone” and “Time” are activated  
only when [Off] is selected.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
3D Settings  
2
Touch [Map Settings].  
The 3D map screen settings can be custo-  
mized.  
The “Map Settings” screen appears.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
2
Touch [3D Settings].  
The “3D Visual Settings” screen appears.  
Available options;  
!
[Map color]  
Enables you to define the map color for day-  
time and nighttime use. Touch this key to  
show the next screen.  
“Daylight color profile:”  
The daytime map color can be set. Touch  
the key and select the desired profile from  
the list.  
Available options;  
!
“Landmarks”  
You can select whether to draws or refrain  
from drawing graphical 3D landmarks on  
the map.  
p This function is available for AVIC-  
F900BT and AVIC-F90BT.  
“Night color profile:”  
The nighttime map color can be set. Touch  
the key and select the desired profile from  
the list.  
“Night mode”  
Changes the settings for the nighttime  
map.  
!
!
!
“Elevated Roads”  
You can select whether to draws or refrain  
from drawing elevated roads, interchanges,  
and bridges on the map.  
[Automatic]:  
Switches the map color defined on “Map  
color” automatically between daytime and  
nighttime.  
“Terrain Detail Level”  
[High], [Medium], [Low]:  
Draws the terrain (e.g. mountain chains) on  
the map with the selected fineness.  
[Off]:  
[Night]:  
Always displays the map in the color de-  
fined on “Night color profile:”.  
[Day]:  
Does not draw the terrain on the map.  
Always displays the map in the color de-  
fined on “Daylight color profile:”.  
“Elevation on 2D Map”  
!
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
You can select whether to draws or refrain  
from drawing the terrain with a realistic  
landscape on the map, such as a green  
space, water place, undulating surface.  
3
Touch the key on the right of “Top  
field:” to display the options.  
!
!
!
“Show Street Labels”  
Shows or hides the street names and city  
names.  
“Textured Polygons”  
You can select whether to draws or refrain  
from drawing the map more graphically.  
“Full Screen Cockpit”  
Shows-hides the “Multi-Info window” and  
“Second manoeuvre arrow”.  
4
Touch your desired option.  
Displayed Info  
Allows you to select what options you want to  
display on each part of the “Multi-Info win-  
dow”.  
p The estimated time of arrival is an ideal  
value that the navigation system computes  
internally as the route is calculated. The es-  
timated time of arrival should be read just  
as a reference value, and does not guaran-  
tee arrival at the time indicated.  
A method for changing the value of Top field:  
is described here along with an operational ex-  
ample.  
Smart Zoom  
Enables the navigation system to zoom in  
automatically when you approach a guidance  
point and zoom out after you pass through it.  
You can setup the behavior while “Smart  
Zoom” is activated.  
p When the route is not set, the navigation  
system will simply zoom in or out depend-  
ing on your speed.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
vate “Smart Zoom”.  
menu.  
Touching  
allows you to enter the detailed  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
setting screen only when [On] has been se-  
lected.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Info” screen appears.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
Available options;  
Available options;  
!
!
!
“Zoom-in limit:”  
Allows you to set the limit for zoom-in beha-  
vior.  
“Zoom-out limit:”  
Allows you to set the limit for zoom-out be-  
havior.  
!
“Route event distance for Overview  
mode:”  
Allows you to set a distance to activate  
“Overview Mode”. The map starts zoom-  
ing out when the distance to the next gui-  
dance point is further than the distance set  
here.  
“Restore Smart Zoom”  
Allows you to set whether “Smart Zoom” is  
to be reactivated after changing the map  
scale, tilt, or rotation.  
!
“Overview zoom level:”  
Allows you to set the map scale for zoom-  
out behavior in “Overview Mode”.  
Also, enables you to set how soon “Smart  
Zoom” interval will be reactivated after  
completion of the operations described pre-  
viously.  
Manage POI  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Setting the POI appearance on page  
130.  
!
“Zoom In After Find”  
Shows the “Map Confirmation Screen” with  
the preset map scale after you have  
searched for a position using one of the  
methods on the “Destination Menu”.  
Manage Track Logs  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Recording your travel history on  
page 132.  
Overview Mode  
Enables the navigation system to zoom out  
automatically up to the selected map scale  
when the next guidance point is distant.  
Route  
The settings related to route calculation can  
be customized.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
%
Touch [Route] on the “Navi Settings”  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
menu.  
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
The “Route Settings” screen appears.  
vate “Overview Mode”.  
Touching  
allows you to enter the detailed  
setting screen only when [On] has been se-  
lected.  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
Calculates a route without avoidance of fer-  
ries.  
[Off]:  
Calculates a route with avoidance of ferries  
to the extent possible.  
“U-turns”  
!
[On]:  
Calculates a route without avoidance of U-  
turns.  
[Off]:  
Available options;  
Calculates a route with avoidance of U-  
turns to the extent possible.  
p Turning back on divided highway is not  
considered a U-turn.  
“Toll Roads”  
[On]:  
Calculates a route without avoidance of toll  
roads areas.  
[Off]:  
Calculates a route with avoidance of toll  
roads areas to the extent possible.  
“Permit Needed”  
!
“Method:”  
Determines which condition takes priority  
for route calculation.  
[Fast]:  
Calculates a route with the shortest travel  
time to your destination as a priority.  
[Short]:  
Calculates a route with the shortest dis-  
tance to your destination as a priority.  
[Easy]:  
Calculates a route to your destination with  
the fewest turning points possible as a  
priority.  
[Economical]:  
Calculates a route on the basis of least fuel  
consumption.  
“U-turn penalty:”  
Allows you to limit the distance increase for  
U-turns.  
“Unpaved Roads”  
!
!
[On]:  
Calculates the route without taking into ac-  
count roads and areas where permission is  
needed for entry.  
[Off]:  
!
!
Calculates the route taking into account the  
roads and areas where permission is  
needed for entry.  
[On]:  
Calculates a route without avoidance of un-  
paved roads.  
[Off]:  
Warnings  
The settings related to warning operations can  
be customized.  
Calculates a route with avoidance of un-  
paved roads to the extent possible.  
“Highways”  
%
Touch [Warnings] on the “Navi Set-  
!
tings” menu.  
[On]:  
The “Warning settings” screen appears.  
Calculates a route without avoidance of  
freeways.  
[Off]:  
Calculates a route with avoidance of free-  
ways to the extent possible.  
!
“Ferries”  
[On]:  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
!
!
“Distance Units”  
Controls the unit of distance and speed  
shown.  
“Coordinate display format”  
Controls the format of latitude and longi-  
tude shown.  
!
!
“Date format”  
Controls the format of date shown.  
“Date delimiter”  
Controls the delimiter format for the date  
shown.  
“Time format”  
Available options;  
!
“Warn When Speeding”  
!
Establishes whether or not to enable the ex-  
cessive speed warnings for when you ex-  
ceed the speed limit.  
Controls the time format shown.  
Restore Factory Settings  
CAUTION  
Resets various settings registered to the navi-  
gation system and restores them to the default  
or factory settings.  
p Some data remains. Read Returning the na-  
vigation system to the default or factory set-  
tings before you operate this function.  
= For more detailed information about the  
items to be deleted, refer to Returning  
the navigation system to the default or  
factory settings on page 153.  
The speed limit is based on the map data-  
base. The speed limit in the database may  
not match the actual speed limit of the cur-  
rent road. This is not a definite value. Be  
sure to drive according to the actual speed  
limit.  
!
“Speeding Tolerance”  
Sets the tolerance for the speed limit  
with a percentage.  
1
Touch [Restore Factory Settings] on the  
Regional Settings  
“Navi Settings” menu.  
The display format for the distance unit, lati-  
tude and longitude, and other settings related  
to time and date can be customized.  
2
Touch [Yes].  
The navigation system will now restart.  
%
Touch [Regional Settings] on the “Navi  
Set Home  
Settings” menu.  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Setting your home position on page  
134.  
Demo Mode  
This is a demonstration function for retail  
stores. After a route is set, touching this key to  
start the simulation of the route guidance.  
1
Touch [Demo Mode] on the “Navi Set-  
tings” menu.  
Available options;  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
“Minimum speed:”  
2
The demonstration guidance will  
Enables the navigation system to automati-  
cally start turning the volume up as the cur-  
rent speed reaches the value set here.  
“Maximum speed:”  
begin.  
p If you want to perform the simulation at fas-  
ter speed, touch [Fly over] on the “Route  
Information” screen.  
Enables the navigation system to automati-  
cally maximize the volume when the current  
speed reaches the value set here.  
= For more details concerning the operation,  
refer to Playing simulated travel at high  
speed on page 42.  
About  
Sound settings  
Enables you to check the copyright and other  
information about the map database.  
All settings here are effective only for the navi-  
gation guidance and beep.  
1
Touch [About].  
%
Touch [Sound settings] on the “Navi  
Copyright information of the database is dis-  
played.  
Settings” menu.  
The “Sound settings” menu appears.  
2
Touch [Maps].  
Touching [Maps] allows you to view the infor-  
mation regarding the map database in detail.  
After that, touching the desired item on the  
list allows you to view more detailed informa-  
tion about the selected map database.  
Setting the POI appearance  
You can display or hide the POI (points of inter-  
est) icons on the map. To avoid the screen be-  
coming crowded with POI icons, all the icons  
have been made invisible as a default setting.  
You can set the conditions for each category  
here and also create new categories.  
p If the custom POI is found on an external  
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation  
system will show a POI list which includes  
them.  
Available options;  
!
“Master”  
Controls the master volume of both the na-  
vigation guidance and beep.  
“Voice”  
!
Controls the volume of the navigation gui-  
dance.  
!
!
“Keys”  
Controls the beep tone volume.  
“Dynamic Volume”  
Increases and decreases the master vo-  
lume of the navigation guidance and beep  
automatically according to the current  
speed. This function is very helpful when  
you are driving at high speed and there is  
too much noisy to hear the guidance in-  
structions and beep.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Manage POI].  
Touching  
allows you to enter the de-  
tailed setting screen only when [On] has  
been selected.  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
Also applies this visibility to all sub-cate-  
gories belonging to this category.  
[Off]:  
3
Touch the desired category that you  
want to display.  
Does not apply this visibility to all sub-cate-  
gories belonging to this category.  
“Icon:”  
Touching the key shows the options avail-  
able. Touch one of them to set the desired  
icon.  
!
!
[Remove]:  
Touching the key allows you to delete the  
selected category.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
p [Remove] is available only for POI cate-  
gories that are created on this naviga-  
tion system.  
If there aren’t anymore detailed categories, a  
blank list appears. In this case, you can only  
create the new category by touching [New  
Group].  
Creating new categories  
If your customized POI does not match any  
pre-installed categories, creating a new cate-  
gory allows you to edit your customized POI so  
that it can belong to this newly-created cate-  
gory.  
p If the custom POI is found on an external  
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation  
system will show a POI list which includes  
them.  
4
Touch [Edit] on the right of the desired  
sub-category to set the appearance.  
5
Touch the desired key to customize it.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
2
3
Touch [Manage POI].  
Touch the desired category.  
Available options;  
! “Set POI visibility distance on map:”  
Touching the key shows the option. Touch  
one of them to set the desired visibility.  
When “Satellite” is selected, the POI icons  
will appear even though they are far away  
from your current position. When “Close” is  
selected, only the nearest POI icons will ap-  
pear. Selecting “Off” hides the POI icons of  
this category.  
!
“Same Visibility in Subgroups”  
[On]:  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step as many  
times as necessary.  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
If there aren’t anymore detailed categories, a  
blank list appears. In this case, touching  
[New Group] allows you to create a new cate-  
gory.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
selected category, repeat this step until the de-  
sired POI appears.  
4
Touch the desired POI.  
4
Touch [New Group] at the screen where  
The “Edit POI” screen appears.  
you want to create a new category.  
5
Touch the desired key to customize it.  
5
Enter the category name and touch  
[Done] to complete the entry.  
Available options;  
!
“Group:”  
The category that the item currently se-  
lected belongs to can be changed. Touch-  
ing the key shows the options available.  
Touch one of them to set the desired cate-  
gory.  
Editing your customized POI  
If you have already stored the customized POI,  
you can edit the POI property.  
p If the custom POI is found on an external  
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation  
system will show a POI list which includes  
them.  
!
“POI Name:”  
Touching the key displays the screen for en-  
tering a new POI name. Enter the name  
and then touch [Done] to complete the  
entry.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
!
!
“Icon:”  
menu.  
Touching the key shows the options avail-  
able. Touch one of them to set the desired  
icon.  
[Remove]:  
Touching the key allows you to delete the  
selected POI.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
2
3
Touch [Manage POI].  
Touch the desired category for editing.  
p [Remove] is available only for POIs that are  
created on this navigation system.  
p The POI address is not editable.  
Recording your travel history  
Activating the track logger enables you to re-  
cord your driving history (hereinafter called  
“track log”). You can review the travel history  
later and replay the travel for your reference.  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
3
Touch the desired track log on the list.  
Activating track logger temporarily  
One-time activation is useful if you want to  
create a log only for that trip.  
More details about the track log appears.  
4
Touch the desired key to operate it.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Manage Track Logs].  
A list of track logs already recorded appears. A  
blank list appears if you have not recorded it  
yet.  
3
Touch [Record] to activate the track log-  
ger.  
Available options;  
!
[Rename]:  
Touching this key displays the screen for en-  
tering a new name for the track log. Enter  
the name and then touch [Done] to com-  
plete the entry.  
!
!
[Delete]:  
Touching this key deletes the track log.  
[Export]:  
Touching this key exports the track log cur-  
rently selected to the external storage de-  
vice (USB or SD).  
The key then changes to [Stop Recording].  
Touching [Stop Recording] allows you to de-  
activate the track logger.  
p If there is not enough space in the built-in  
memory, the oldest track log will be over-  
written by the new one.  
p If you want to permanently activate the  
track logger whenever the GPS signal is  
available, switch “Enable Auto-saving” to  
“On”.  
!
!
[Export all track logs]:  
Touching this key exports all track logs cur-  
rently stored to the external storage device  
(USB or SD) at once.  
The key next to “Color on the map:”:  
Touching this key displays the screen for  
changing the color used for the route high-  
lighting of the track log. Touch the desired  
color on the color list. The color of track  
logs is assigned automatically within prede-  
fined colors when this setting is estab-  
lished.  
= For details, refer to Setting the track log-  
ger options on this page.  
Browsing and replaying the track log  
Setting the track logger options  
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
1
Touch [Visual] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
1
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
The “Visual Settings” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Manage Track Logs].  
A list of track logs already recorded appears.  
Touching enables you to replay the track  
log with “Fly over”.  
2
3
Touch [Manage Track Logs].  
Touch [Track Log Options].  
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
4
Touch the desired key to operate it.  
2
Touch the key next to “Address:”.  
Available options;  
3
Perform one of the search methods and  
!
“Update interval:”  
locate the cursor on your desired position.  
Sets how often the system updates the log.  
“Current autosave track size:”  
Sets a size limit on automatic logging. This  
setting will be effective only when “Enable  
Auto-saving” is “On”.  
!
!
“Enable Auto-saving”  
Sets whether the automatic logging is acti-  
vated or not.  
!
!
“Limit Track DB Size”  
Limits the total data size for logging.  
“Maximum track database size:”  
Sets a size limit on logging. This parameter  
can be adjustable only when “Limit Track  
DB Size” is “On”.  
4
5
6
Touch [OK].  
Touch the key next to “Phone #”.  
Enter your home phone number, then  
!
“Create NMEA Log”  
touch [Done].  
Creates the log files in the SD memory  
card. When this setting is “On”, the system  
outputs the log files with NMEA-0183 for-  
mat onto the SD memory card.  
The options on the “System  
Settings” menu.  
Displaying the “System  
Settings” menu  
Setting your home position  
Registering your home position saves time  
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can  
be calculated easily with a single touch of the  
key from the “Destination Menu”. The regis-  
tered home position can also be modified  
later.  
1
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
Menu”, and then touch [Settings].  
2
Touch [System Settings].  
The “System Settings” menu appears.  
1
Touch [Set Home] on the “Navi Set-  
tings” menu.  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
2
Touch the key next to “Voice lan-  
guage:”.  
The language list is displayed.  
3
Touch the desired language.  
After the language is selected, the screen re-  
turns to the previous screen.  
4
Touch the key next to “Program lan-  
guage:”.  
5
Touch the desired language.  
If you change [Program language:], a mes-  
sage prompting you to reboot appears. Touch  
[OK] reboots the system.  
Selecting the language  
You can set the languages used on the pro-  
gram and voice guidance. Each language can  
be set separately.  
p If you use voice operation, select [English]  
in [Program language:] of “Language”. If  
you select other languages, voice operation  
will not be available.  
Changing the splash screen  
You can change the splash screen that ap-  
pears when the navigation system starts. Copy  
your favorite image to the external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD), and select the image to im-  
port.  
= For details, refer to Basics of Voice Oper-  
ation on page 146.  
p Splash screen images should be used with-  
in the following formats;  
1
Touch [Language] on the “System Set-  
— BMP or JPEG files  
— Allowable horizontal and vertical size  
are 2 592 x 1 944 or smaller  
tings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” menu on the previous page.  
— Allowable data size is 15 MB or smaller  
p Proper compatibility with allowable files is  
not guaranteed.  
p Imported original images will be stored in  
the built-in memory, but the ability to save  
these images cannot be guaranteed com-  
pletely. If your original image data is de-  
leted, set the external storage device (USB,  
SD) again and re-import the original image.  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
1
Create a folder named “Pictures” on the  
to the shift lever position after touching [Rear-  
View] on the “AV Source” menu. [RearView]  
is useful if you want to monitor an attached  
trailer, etc.  
top-most directory of the external storage  
device (USB, SD) and store the picture files  
in this folder.  
2
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
CAUTION  
card slot or plug the USB storage device to  
the USB connector.  
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which  
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the  
screen image may appear reversed.  
3
Touch [Splash Screen] on the “System  
Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” menu on page 134.  
p Immediately verify whether the display  
changes to a rear view camera image when  
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)  
from another position.  
p When the whole screen changes to a rear  
view camera image during normal driving,  
switch to another setting.  
The navigation system checks the external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD). If an appropriate file is  
found, the file list will be displayed.  
p If there is no “Pictures” folder or loadable  
file, a message appears.  
p You can switch the list by touching [Import  
from SD] and [Import from USB].  
p Initially, this function is set to “Off”.  
1
Touch [Back Camera] on the “System  
4
Touch the image to use as the splash  
Settings” menu.  
screen from the list.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” menu on page 134.  
The “Camera Input” screen appears.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
system returns to the “System Settings”  
menu.  
2
Touch [On] next to “Camera” to acti-  
vate the camera setting.  
p Unless this setting is [On], you cannot  
switch to “RearView”.  
Setting the rear view camera  
3
Touch [Battery] or [GND] next to  
“Polarity” to select the appropriate polarity  
setting.  
The following two functions are available. The  
rear view camera feature requires a separately  
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-  
tails, consult your dealer.)  
!
Battery — When the polarity of the con-  
nected lead is positive while the shift lever  
is in the REVERSE (R) position  
Back up camera  
!
GND — When the polarity of the connected  
lead is negative while the shift lever is in  
the REVERSE (R) position  
The navigation system features a function that  
automatically switches to the full-screen rear  
camera image installed on your vehicle. When  
the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position,  
the screen automatically switches to full-  
screen rear view camera.  
Camera for “RearView”  
[RearView] can be displayed the full-screen  
rear camera image any time without relation  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
4
Touch anywhere on the screen.  
Adjusting the response  
positions of the touch panels  
(touch panel calibration)  
The adjusted position data will be saved.  
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the  
screen deviate from the actual positions that  
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-  
sitions of the touch panel screen.  
5
Touch [OK].  
p Make sure to use the supplied stylus for ad-  
justment and gently touch the screen. If  
you press the touch panel forcefully, the  
touch panel may be damaged. Do not use  
a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint  
pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the  
screen may become damaged.  
Stylus (supplied with the navigation  
system)  
Adjusting the screen brightness  
“Brightness” modifies the black level of the  
screen.  
1
Touch [Picture Adjustment] on the “Sys-  
tem Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” menu on page 134.  
1
Touch [Screen Calibration] on the “Sys-  
tem Settings” menu.  
A message confirming whether to start the ca-  
libration appears.  
2
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the brightness.  
p You can also start the calibration by keep  
Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or de-  
creases the level. +10 to 00 is displayed as the  
level is increased or decreased.  
pressing MENU button on the “Top Menu”.  
2
Touch [OK].  
3
Touch  
to return to the previous  
screen.  
p You can also start the adjustment by keep  
pressing MAP button.  
Setting the illumination color  
The illumination color can be selected from 11  
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination  
color can switched between these 11 colors in  
order.  
3
With the stylus, touch and hold the ar-  
rows that point to the center and corners  
of the LCD screen.  
The arrow indicates the order.  
137  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or de-  
creases the value of selected item. +31 to +00  
is displayed as the value is increased or de-  
creased.  
Selecting the color from the preset  
colors  
1
Touch [Illumi Color] on the “System Set-  
tings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” menu on page 134.  
2
Touch desired color.  
Current color balance  
p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-  
lues set to 0.  
4
Touch [Memory 1], [Memory 2] or  
[Memory 3] to store the illumination color.  
5
Touch to return to the previous  
Available options;  
screen.  
!
Colored keys — Selects the desired preset  
color  
!
Memory 1/Memory 2/Memory 3 — Col-  
ors registered in the memory  
= For details, refer to Creating a favorite  
color and storing it to memory on this  
page.  
Checking the version information  
Touch [Service Information] on the  
“System Settings” menu.  
1
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
!
Scan — Shifts between the eight default  
colors in sequence gradually.  
Settings” menu on page 134.  
2
Check the version information.  
Creating a favorite color and storing  
it to memory  
Turning off the screen  
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,  
you can turn off the screen display without  
turning off the voice guidance.  
You can create a favorite color and set it as the  
illumination color.  
1
Touch [Illumi Color] on the “System Set-  
%
Touch [Screen Off] on the “System Set-  
tings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
tings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” menu on page 134.  
The screen is turned off.  
Settings” menu on page 134.  
2
3
Touch [Custom].  
p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-  
p To turn on the screen, touch anywhere on  
lected.  
the screen.  
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the values for  
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite  
color.  
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while  
adjusting the color.  
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
2
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust front/rear  
The “AV Sound” menu options  
speaker balance.  
Displaying the “AV Sound” menu  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the front/rear  
speaker balance moves towards the front or  
the rear.  
“Front:15” to “Rear:15” is displayed as the  
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to  
rear.  
1
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
Menu”, and then touch [Settings].  
2
Touch [AV Sound].  
The “AV Sound” menu appears.  
Setting “Front:” and “Rear:” to “0” is proper if  
two speaker system being used.  
When the rear output setting is [Rear SP  
Sub W], you cannot adjust front/rear speaker  
balance.  
= Refer to Setting the rear output on page 144.  
3
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust left/right  
speaker balance.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the left/right  
speaker balance moves towards the left or the  
right.  
Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/  
right speaker balance moves from left to right.  
p When AV source is “Off”, you cannot per-  
form adjustments.  
p When selecting the FM tuner as the AV  
source, you cannot select [SLA].  
Using the equalizer  
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to  
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics  
as desired.  
Using balance adjustment  
You can select a fader/balance setting that  
provides an ideal listening environment in all  
occupied seats.  
1
Touch [FAD/BAL] on the “AV Sound”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound” menu on this page.  
When the rear output setting is [Rear SP]  
[Sub W], [Balance] will be displayed instead  
of [FAD/BAL].  
= Refer to Setting the rear output on page 144.  
139  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is selected, the  
equalizer curve settings will be memorized  
in Custom1.  
A Custom2 curve can be created common  
to all sources. If you make adjustments  
when Custom2 curve is selected, the Cus-  
tom2 curve will be updated.  
The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized  
for each of the source selected, but one  
curve is shared for the following sources.  
— CD, ROM, DVD-V, DVD-VR, DivX (for  
AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT)  
Recalling equalizer curves  
There are seven stored equalizer curves that  
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list  
of the equalizer curves:  
!
!
Equalizer curve  
S.Bass  
S.Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is  
boosted.  
Powerful  
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are boosted.  
— CD, ROM (for AVIC-F700BT and AVIC-  
F7010BT)  
— XM and SIRIUS  
Natural  
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.  
— AV1 and AV2  
— EXT1 and EXT2  
The different source volume level can be  
set between iPod and USB.  
When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or  
correction is made to the sound. This is  
useful to check the effect of the equalizer  
curves by switching alternatively between  
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.  
Vocal  
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the  
human vocal range, is boosted.  
!
!
Flat  
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.  
Custom1  
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each  
source.  
Custom2  
Adjustable parameters  
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all  
AV source.  
You can adjust the center frequency, level and  
the Q factor (curve characteristics) of each  
currently selected curve band (Low/Mid/  
High).  
1
2
Touch [EQ] on the “AV Sound” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound” menu on the previous page.  
Touch desired equalizer.  
p You can also sequentially select the desired  
equalizer curve by touching [EQ] on the AV  
operation screen of each source.  
Adjusting the equalizer curves  
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer  
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be  
made with a 3-band parametric equalizer.  
!
!
Band:  
You can select the equalizer band.  
Frequency:  
You can select which frequency to be set as  
the center frequency.  
Level:  
You can select the decibel (dB) level of the  
selected EQ.  
The difference between “Custom1” and  
“Custom2”  
!
!
A separate Custom1 curve can be created  
for each source. If you make adjustments  
when a curve S.Bass, Powerful, Natural,  
140  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
!
Q:  
Adjusting loudness  
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the  
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.  
You can select the details of the curve char-  
acteristics. (The following figure shows the  
characteristic image.)  
1
Touch [Loudness] on the “AV Sound”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound” menu on page 139.  
2
Touch [Loudness] to select a desired  
level.  
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is  
selected in the following order:  
Off — Low — Mid — High  
1
2
Touch [EQ] on the “AV Sound” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound” menu on page 139.  
Using subwoofer output  
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-  
woofer output mechanism, which can be  
turned on or off.  
Touch the one of keys to select a curve  
that you want to use as the basis of custo-  
mizing.  
p Only when “Sub Woofer” is [On], you can  
adjust “Phase”, “Level” and “Frequency”.  
3
4
Touch [Customize].  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the equalizer  
1
Touch [Sub Woofer] on the “AV Sound”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
band to adjust.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d] selects equali-  
zer bands in the following order:  
Low — Mid — High  
Sound” menu on page 139.  
2
on.  
Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output  
5
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired  
frequency.  
Touch [c] or [d] until the desired frequency  
appears in the display.  
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].  
Low: 40 Hz — 80 Hz — 100 Hz — 160 Hz  
Mid: 200 Hz — 500 Hz — 1 kHz — 2 kHz  
High: 3.15 kHz — 8 kHz — 10 kHz —  
12.5 kHz  
6
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust the level of  
the equalizer band.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the level of  
the equalization band increases or decreases.  
+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
3
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select  
the phase of subwoofer output.  
7
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired Q  
4
Touch [+] or [–] next to “Level” to adjust  
factor.  
the output level.  
+6 to –24 is displayed as the level is increased  
or decreased.  
Touch [c] or [d] until the desired Q factor ap-  
pears in the display.  
Wide2 — Wide1 — Narrow1 — Narrow2  
141  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
!
!
CD, ROM, DivX (for AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-  
F90BT)  
CD, ROM (for AVIC-F700BT and AVIC-  
F7010BT)  
XM and SIRIUS  
AV1 and AV2  
5
Touch [+] or [–] next to “Frequency” to  
select cut-off frequency.  
Each time you touch [+] or [–], cut-off frequen-  
cies are selected in the following order:  
50 Hz — 63 Hz — 80 Hz — 100 Hz — 125 Hz  
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-  
lected range are output from the subwoofer.  
!
!
!
EXT1 and EXT2  
p The different source volume level can be set  
between iPod and USB.  
Using the high pass filter  
p For AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT, the  
source volume level can be set to DVD-V  
and DVD-VR respectively as well as differ-  
ently from the other sources of the built-in  
DVD drive previously mentioned.  
When you do not want low sounds from the  
subwoofer output frequency range to play  
from the front or rear speakers, activate HPF  
(high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than  
those in the selected range are output from  
the front or rear speakers.  
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)  
The “Bass Booster” enhances bass sounds,  
which can be muted by driving noise.  
1
Touch [HPF] on the “AV Sound” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound” menu on page 139.  
1
Touch [Bass Booster] on the “AV  
2
Touch [HPF] to select cut-off frequency.  
Sound” menu.  
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
Off — 50 Hz — 63 Hz — 80 Hz — 100 Hz —  
125 Hz  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound” menu on page 139.  
2
Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the range from  
0 to 6.  
Adjusting source levels  
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust  
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-  
dical changes in volume when switching be-  
tween sources.  
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume  
level, which remains unchanged.  
The options on the “AV  
Settings” menu  
Displaying the “AV Settings” menu  
1
Press MENU button to display the “Top  
Menu”, and then touch [Settings].  
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level  
2
Touch [AV Settings].  
with the level of the source you wish to ad-  
just.  
The “AV Settings” menu appears.  
2
Touch [SLA] on the “AV Sound” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound” menu on page 139.  
3
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vo-  
lume.  
+4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is  
increased or decreased.  
Following AV sources are set to the same  
source level adjustment volume automatically.  
142  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
%
Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Set-  
tings” menu on the previous page.  
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
Off — No video component is connected  
Video — External video component  
p Use AV2 Input when connecting CD-RM10  
(sold separately) through the external video  
component.  
p Only when selecting the AV source with  
video, you can adjust [Wide Mode].  
p Only when the AV source is “Off”, the fol-  
lowing items can be adjusted;  
Switching the auto antenna  
setting  
If the blue lead of the navigation system is  
connected to the antenna control terminal of  
the vehicle, select either of the following set-  
tings.  
[MUTE Input/GUIDE] and [Rear SP]  
Setting video input 1 (AV1)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting is effective for RCA inputs  
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on back-  
side.  
!
Radio — The antenna extends or turns on  
only when the audio source is FM or AM.  
The antenna is stored or turned off when  
the AV source is switched to another  
source.  
!
Power — The antenna extends or turns on  
when the ignition switch is turned on. The  
antenna is stored or turned off when the  
ignition switch is turned off.  
%
Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Set-  
tings” menu on the previous page.  
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
%
Touch [Ant CTRL] on the “AV Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Set-  
tings” menu on the previous page.  
Touching [Ant CTRL] switches between  
[Radio] and [Power].  
!
!
Off — No video component is connected  
iPod — iPod connected with the USB Inter-  
face cable for iPod (CD-IU230V)  
!
!
Video — External video component  
EXT — Pioneer external unit connected  
with the RCA video cable  
p Regardless of whether [Radio] or [Power]  
is selected, turning off the ignition switch  
will cause the antenna to automatically re-  
tract or turn off.  
Setting video input 2 (AV2)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting is effective for mini-jack input  
on front panel.  
Changing the wide screen mode  
%
Touch [Wide Mode] on the “AV Set-  
tings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Set-  
tings” menu on the previous page.  
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
143  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
25  
Customizing preferences  
!
!
!
MUTE — Muting  
ATT — Attenuation  
Normal — Volume does not change  
Full — Normal  
Full (full)  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal di-  
rection only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV pic-  
ture (normal picture) without any omissions.  
Normal (normal)  
p Operation returns to normal when the cor-  
respond action is ended.  
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving you  
no sense of disparity since its proportions are  
the same as that of the normal picture.  
p Different settings can be memorized for  
each video source.  
Setting the rear output  
The navigation system’s rear output can be  
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer  
connection. If you switch Rear SP to Sub W,  
you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to  
a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp.  
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear  
full-range speaker connection (Full).  
p The same setting is automatically applied  
for the following grouping.  
!
!
!
SD, USB, iPod  
AV1 and AV2  
EXT1 and EXT2  
1
Touch [Rear SP] on the “AV Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Set-  
p When video is viewed in a wide screen  
mode that does not match its original as-  
pect ratio, it may appear differently.  
p Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the author’s  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-  
era picture is always viewed at Full.  
tings” menu on page 142.  
2
Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-  
put setting.  
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Full.  
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select Sub W.  
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA  
rear output are switched simultaneously in  
this setting. (When you use the product  
without RCA rear output, this setting is ef-  
fective for rear speaker leads only.)  
Switching the sound muting/  
attenuation  
You can select the muting method when the  
navigation guidance is output. This setting is  
also effective for a mute signal that has been  
received from the MUTE lead connected to the  
navigation system.  
Acquiring iPod music information  
p When you use a cellular phone connected  
with Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,  
incoming call), the AV source volume is al-  
ways muted independently of this setting.  
p When the voice recognition mode is acti-  
vated, the AV source volume is always  
muted independently of this setting.  
This navigation system tries to acquire the in-  
formation needed to operate iPod with voice  
commands in advance. It may take a short per-  
iod of time to transfer the information if there  
are many entries in the iPod. Change the set-  
ting according to your usage.  
The navigation system starts acquiring music  
information when the iPod is connected or  
when the system boots up while the iPod is  
connected.  
%
Touch [MUTE Input/GUIDE] on the “AV  
Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Set-  
tings” menu on page 142.  
Each touch of [MUTE Input/GUIDE] changes  
the settings as follows:  
p If you do not use iPod, this setting is unne-  
cessary.  
144  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
25  
p If you always set the language other than  
“English” on “Program language:”, select  
[Off].  
p During transfer, iPod operations (such as  
[Shuffle], [Menu], or [Video]) are not avail-  
able.  
p If you select “Off”or acquiring the informa-  
tion from connected iPod has not com-  
pleted, the part of voice commands related  
to iPod operation cannot be used.  
1
Touch [VR Catalog Mode] on the “AV  
Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Set-  
tings” menu on page 142.  
2
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
vate “VR Catalog Mode”.  
p To stop acquiring the information, touch  
[Cancel] on during acquiring process.  
145  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
26  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
To Ensure Safe Driving  
Some functions of the navigation system sup-  
ports voice operation.  
p The navigation function is not available  
using voice operation.  
Basics of Voice Operation  
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest  
in voice recognition technology. You can use  
voice commands to operate many of its func-  
tions. This chapter describes where you can  
use voice commands, and also what com-  
mands the system accepts.  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the  
voice operation as much as possible while  
driving.  
Flow of voice operation  
You can start voice operation any time even  
when the map screen is displayed or audio is  
operating. (Some operations are not available.)  
The basic steps of voice operations are as  
follows.  
If you use voice operation, select [English] in  
[Program language:] of “Language”. If you  
select other languages, voice operation will not  
be available.  
1
Switch the screen to map screen or AV  
operation screen.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 18.  
2
Press MULTI-CONTROL to activate voice  
operations.  
3
Speak a command into the microphone  
after the beep.  
4
When the command is recognized, the  
navigation system displays next options on  
the screen, and pronounces it in some case-  
s.  
5
6
Repeat previous step as necessary.  
The requested operation will be carried  
out.  
p The voice operation may not be operable for a  
minute after the navigation system has booted  
up.  
146  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
26  
Starting voice operation  
Operating iPod by voice  
%
Press MULTI-CONTROL on map screen  
You can play music using voice operation from  
the iPod connected to the navigation system.  
p Playback of iPod movies is not available  
using voice commands.  
or the AV operation screen.  
The voice operation screen appears.  
p In default, the music information is trans-  
ferred when the iPod is connected to the  
navigation system to be used with voice op-  
eration. If you don’t use the iPod, switch  
[VR Catalog Mode] on the “AV Settings”  
menu to deactivate this function.  
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are  
shown below. (A method for playing the album  
title named “Pioneer” is described here, along  
with an operational example.)  
If you lose your way...  
You can listen to the brief operating instruc-  
1
Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-  
eration.  
tion by touching  
.
2
Say “Change Source” to display the AV  
To cancel voice operation  
source selection screen.  
You can cancel the voice operation feature at  
any time by saying “Cancel”. After you cancel  
voice operations, the display returns to the  
screen displayed before the voice operation  
screen appeared.  
3
Say “iPod” on the selection screen to  
switch the AV source to iPod.  
p Touching the item on the screen also en-  
ables you to select the desired AV source.  
p You can also cancel voice operation if you  
touch on the voice operation screen, or  
press MENU button or MAP button.  
4
Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-  
eration.  
5
Say “Play the album Pioneer” to play-  
back the album name “Pioneer”.  
If the command is recognized properly, play-  
back starts from the first song of “Pioneer”.  
Calling the entry on “Contacts”  
A method for dialing the entry named “Nancy”  
is described here along with an operational ex-  
ample.  
1
Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-  
eration.  
2
Say “Call Nancy” to make a call.  
Dialing starts.  
147  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
26  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Available Basic Voice Commands  
The navigation system can also recognize the  
words in the following list.  
Basic commands  
Voice commands and operations  
Back d Returns the previous screen.  
Cancel d Cancels the voice operation.  
Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice.  
Voice operation for the iPod  
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Play-  
list name>, <Genre name> shown on the fol-  
lowing chart, say the name their name in the  
iPod.  
p Playback of iPod movies is not available  
using voice commands.  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Pause the music, Stop the music d Pauses the song currently playing .  
Resume the music d Resumes the song currently playing .  
Next song d Plays the next song.  
Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.  
Play songs d Start playback from the top of “Songs”.  
Play artists d Start playback from the top of “Artists”.  
Play the artist <Artist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected artist.  
Play albums d Start playback from the top of “Albums”.  
Play the album <Album name> d Start playback from the top of the selected album.  
Play playlists d Start playback from the top of “Playlists”.  
Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Start playback from the top of the selected playlist.  
Play genres d Start playback from the top of “Genres”.  
Play the genre <Genre name> d Start playback from the top of the selected genre.  
Show artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the desired  
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to continue  
the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the de-  
sired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
148  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
26  
Show playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the de-  
sired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the desired  
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Touch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Show songs d Displays the song list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Touch the desired  
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.  
Page down, Page up d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (Note 1)  
(Note 1) The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed.  
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)  
AV source selection  
Voice commands and operations  
Change Source to DISC d Switch the AV source to DISC.  
Change Source to FM d Switch the AV source to FM.  
Change Source to AM d Switch the AV source to AM.  
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to XM.  
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switch the AV source to SIRIUS.  
Change Source to HD Radio d Switch the AV source to Digital Radio.  
Change Source to SD Media d Switch the AV source to SD.  
Change Source to USB d Switch the AV source to USB.  
Change Source to iPod d Switch the AV source to iPod.  
Change Source d Switch to the AV source selection screen. d Touch the desired AV source or say the desired AV  
source name.  
External storage device (USB, SD)  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Pause the music, Stop the music d Pauses the song currently playing .  
Resume the music d Resumes the song currently playing .  
Next song d Plays the next song.  
Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.  
149  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
26  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning  
p You can make a phone call by voice dialing  
if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
wireless technology is being paired with  
the navigation system.  
p For <entry’s name> shown on the follow-  
ing chart, say the name of the entry stored  
in “Contacts”.  
p For <phone number> shown on the follow-  
ing chart, say the desired phone number.  
Voice commands and operations  
Call <entry’s name> d Make a call to the entry (Note 2).  
Call <entry’s name> mobile d Dial the mobile phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entry’s name> home d Dial the home phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <entry’s name> office d Dial the office phone number of the entry (Note 3).  
Call <phone number> d Dial the phone number.  
Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d The system starts dialing to the number.  
Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on “Contacts” you want to call d The system starts dialing to the num-  
ber (Note2).  
List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Numbers”) to select the number and call.  
List recent calls d Incoming calls (Note 4) d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select  
the number and call.  
List recent calls d Outgoing calls (Note 4) d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Numbers”) to select  
the number and call.  
List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the number and  
call.  
(Note 2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone  
number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.  
(Note 3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry.  
In such case, say the type of phone number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.  
(Note 4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.  
150  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Tips for Voice Operation  
26  
For your voice commands to be correctly re-  
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-  
tions are suitable for recognition.  
Close the vehicle windows  
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-  
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the  
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.  
Position the microphone carefully  
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should  
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front  
of the driver.  
Pause before giving a command  
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition  
to fail.  
Pronounce your commands carefully  
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.  
151  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Other functions  
Entering the password  
Setting the anti-theft function  
On the password input screen, you must enter  
the current password. If you enter the incor-  
rect password three times, the screen is  
locked and operations with using touch panel  
keys cannot be performed.  
You can set a password for the navigation sys-  
tem. If the back-up lead is cut or RESET button  
is pressed after the password is set, the navi-  
gation system prompts for the password at the  
time of next boot up.  
1
Enter the password.  
Setting the password  
2
Touch [Done].  
1
With the map displayed, press MENU  
The message “Antitheft is being unlocked.  
Do not switch off during the process.” ap-  
pears if you can enter the correct password  
and the navigation system will be unlocked.  
button.  
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
Deleting the password  
The current password can be deleted.  
1
With the map displayed, press MENU  
button.  
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
Area1  
Area2  
Area3  
4
Touch [Clear password].  
The password setting screen appears.  
4
Touch [Set Password].  
The password setting screen appears.  
5
6
7
Enter the current password.  
Touch [Done].  
5
Enter the password you want to set.  
p Five to sixteen characters can be entered  
for a password.  
Touch [Yes].  
The message for deletion appears and then  
the current password is deleted.  
6
7
Touch [Done].  
Reenter the password to confirm the  
setting.  
Forgotten passwords  
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-  
vice Station.  
8
Touch [Done].  
Password-protecting is completed.  
p If you want to change the password cur-  
rently set, enter the current password and  
then enter the new one.  
152  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
27  
Returning the navigation  
system to the default or  
factory settings  
You can return settings or recorded content to  
the default or factory settings. There are three  
methods to clear user data, and the situations  
and the cleared content are different for each  
method. For information regarding the content  
that is cleared by each method, see the list  
presented later.  
Method 1: Press RESET button  
Pressing RESET button clears almost all set-  
tings of the audio function.  
This transforms the system into the same state  
as when the battery of the vehicle is removed  
or the yellow lead of the navigation system is  
disconnected.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Resetting the microprocessor on page 11.  
Method 2: Restore Factory Settings  
Clears some items in the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Restore Factory Set-  
tings on page 129.  
Method 3: Reboot the software  
Some settings are reset when the software re-  
boots. For example, the settings of [Program  
language:] in “Language” is changed.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the language  
on page 135.  
153  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter  
27  
Other functions  
Setting items to be deleted  
The items to be deleted vary depending on the  
reset method. The items listed in the following  
table return to the default or factory settings.  
p Almost all items not listed below will be re-  
tained. However, some items to be returned  
to the default value are not listed if the set-  
ting value can be easily recovered by user,  
such as the last map scale, the last status  
of AV operation screen, etc.  
— : The setting will be retained.  
1 : The setting will be cleared and returned to  
the default or factory settings.  
Navigation functions  
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3  
Destination Menu  
All settings on “MSN Direct” (*)  
—
—
1
—
—
[Set Home]  
—
[GPS & Time Settings], [Visual], [Route], [Warn-  
ings], [Regional Settings]  
—
—
1
1
—
—
[Sound settings]  
“Voice”, “Keys”, “Dynamic Volume (On/Off)”  
Navi Settings  
[Sound settings]  
“Master”, “Dynamic Volume(Maximum speed:,  
Minimum speed:)”  
—
—
—
[Language]  
—
—
1
—
—
System Settings  
Other settings  
—
(*) This function is available for AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT.  
Audio functions  
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3  
[Wide Mode], [VR Catalog Mode]  
—
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
AV Settings  
Other settings  
AV Sound  
All settings  
CD, ROM, DVD-V,  
DVD-VR, DivX, FM,  
AM, SD, USB  
All settings (*1)  
1
1
—
—
—
—
Volume setting for AV sources  
(*1) All settings including the setting on the “Function” menu are to be deleted.  
154  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common  
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-  
sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be  
found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.  
Problems with the navigation screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
The power doesn’t turn on. The Leads and connectors are incor-  
navigation system doesn’t oper- rectly connected.  
Confirm once more that all connections are  
correct.  
ate.  
The fuse is blown.  
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then  
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-  
rect fuse with the same rate.  
Noise and other factors are causing Press RESET button. (Page 11)  
the built-in microprocessor to oper-  
ate incorrectly.  
You cannot position your vehicle The quality of signals from the GPS Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-  
on the map without a significant satellites is poor, causing reduced tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-  
positioning error.  
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of tinue driving until reception improves. Keep  
signal quality may occur for the fol- the antenna clear.  
lowing reasons:  
• The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-  
ble location.  
• Obstacles are blocking signals  
from the satellites.  
• The position of satellites relative to  
your vehicle is inadequate.  
• Signals from the GPS satellites  
have been modified to reduce accu-  
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by  
the US Department of Defense, and  
the US government reserves the  
right to distort positioning data for  
military reasons. This may lead to  
greater positioning errors.)  
• If a vehicle phone or cellular  
phone is used near the GPS anten-  
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-  
porarily.  
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals.  
Signals from the vehicle’s speed  
Check that the cables are properly connected.  
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed  
erly. (This information is intended  
for AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT.)  
the system.  
155  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
The navigation system may not be  
mounted securely in your vehicle.  
Check that the navigation system is securely  
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer  
that installed the system.  
You cannot position your vehicle  
on the map without a significant  
positioning error.  
The navigation system is installed  
with an extreme angle exceeding  
the installation angle limitations.  
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-  
tion system must be installed within the al-  
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to  
“Installation Manual”.)  
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal  
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The  
reversing.  
navigation system works properly without the  
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will  
be adversely affected.)  
The map color does not switch [Night mode] is set to [Day].  
Check [Night mode] setting and make sure  
automatically between daytime  
[Automatic] is selected. (Page 125)  
and nighttime.  
The orange/white lead is not con-  
Check the connection.  
nected.  
The screen is too bright.  
The display is very dim.  
An improper value has been set on Check the settings.  
“Brightness”.  
[Night] is selected in “Night  
Check the setting of [Night mode] and select  
mode”.  
[Automatic] or [Day]. (Page 125)  
No sounds of AV source are pro- The volume level is low.  
Adjust the volume level.  
Turn the attenuator or mute off.  
Check the connection.  
duced.  
The attenuator or mute is on.  
The volume level will not rise.  
A speaker lead is disconnected.  
Adjusting the volume of naviga- You cannot adjust these with  
tion guidance and beeps is not MULTI-CONTROL.  
possible.  
Turn the volume up or down according to  
[Sound settings] on the “Navi Settings”  
menu. (Page 60)  
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the  
Use the following methods to reduce the  
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:  
conversation due to an echo.  
from the speakers and then picked —Lower the volume on the receiver  
up by the microphone again, creat- —Have both speakers pause slightly before  
ing an echo.  
speaking  
There’s no picture.  
The parking brake cord is not con-  
nected.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The parking brake is not applied.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The backlight of the LCD panel is  
turned off.  
Turn on the backlight. (Page 138)  
“Rear display” picture disap-  
pears. (This information is in-  
tended for AVIC-F900BT and  
AVIC-F90BT.)  
The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.  
the navigation system has been  
ejected.  
This problem may occur when certain con-  
nection methods are used.  
There is a problem with the “Rear  
display”, for example a faulty wiring  
connection.  
Check the “Rear display” and its connection.  
The AV source that cannot output to Select the appropriate AV source.  
the rear display is selected.  
156  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The setting for the rear view camera Select the appropriate setting for the rear  
is incorrect.  
view camera.  
Nothing is displayed and the  
touch panel keys cannot be  
used.  
The shift lever was placed in [R]  
when the rear view camera was not button to return to the “Top Menu” and then  
Press MAP button, and then press MENU  
connected.  
select the correct polarity setting for [Back  
Camera]. (Page 136)  
There is no response when the The touch panel keys deviate from  
Perform the touch panel calibration. (Page  
touch panel key are touched or the actual positions that respond to 137)  
a different key responds.  
your touch for some reason.  
Problems in the AV screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (See)  
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean disc.  
sible.  
The disc is dirty.  
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.  
maged.  
The files on the disc are an irregular Check the file format.  
file format.  
The disc format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace disc.  
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type of disc it is. (For more cau-  
cannot play.  
tions about handling each type of media,  
refer to Page 169.)  
The screen is covered with the  
caution message and the video nected or applied.  
cannot be shown.  
The parking brake lead is not con-  
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and  
apply the parking brake.  
The parking brake interlock is acti- Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
vated.  
the parking brake.or details, refer to “Impor-  
tant Information for the user”.  
No video output from connected [AV1 Input] or [AV2 Input] setting Please read the following page and establish  
equipments.  
is incorrect.  
the setting correctly. (Page 120)  
No video output from connected  
iPod.  
The connection of the USB interface Connect both USB plug and RCA cable side.  
cable for iPod is incorrect.  
(If only either connection has made, iPod will  
not works properly.)or details, refer to “Impor-  
tant Information for the user”.  
The audio or video skips.  
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.  
secured.  
No sounds are produced.  
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or  
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.  
with DVD-Video.  
The system is paused or performing, For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),  
fast reverse or forward during the  
disc playback.  
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.  
The icon 9 is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible  
eration is not possible. with the video configuration.  
This operation is not possible. (For example,  
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,  
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)  
The picture stops (pauses) and The reading of data is impossible  
the navigation system cannot be during disc playback.  
operated.  
After touching g once, start playback once  
more.  
157  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The aspect setting is incorrect for  
the display.  
Select the appropriate setting for that image.  
(Page 143, Page 83)  
The picture is stretched, the as-  
pect is incorrect.  
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.  
played and DVD playback is not  
possible.  
Turn parental lock off or change the level.  
(Page 83)  
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.  
cannot be canceled.  
Input the correct code number. (Page 83)  
Playback is not with the audio  
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language  
settings selected in [DVD  
The DVD playing does not feature  
Switching to a selected language is not possi-  
ble if the language selected in [DVD Setup]  
is not recorded on the disc.  
selected in [DVD Setup].  
Setup].  
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible  
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have  
with the copy guard analog copy protect sys-  
tem, when playing a disc that has a signal  
prohibiting copying, the picture may suffer  
from horizontal stripes or other imperfections  
when viewed on some displays. This does not  
mean the navigation system is malfunction-  
ing.  
back.  
this.)  
Cannot be operated.  
The iPod is frozen.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Update the software version of iPod.  
An error has occurred.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut  
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to  
“Acc off”. Then start the engine again, and  
turn the power to the navigation system back  
on. If this does not solve the problem, press  
RESET button on the navigation system.  
! Update the software version of iPod.  
Problems with the phone screen  
Symptom Cause  
Action (See)  
Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser-  
the touch panel keys for dialing vice.  
are inactive.  
Retry after re-entering the range for service.  
The connection between the cellular Perform the connection process.  
phone and the navigation system  
cannot be established now.  
If the screen becomes frozen...  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut off  
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc  
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on. If this  
does not solve the problem, press RESET but-  
ton on the navigation system.  
158  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages and how to react to them  
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.  
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a  
case, follow the instructions given on the display.  
Messages for navigation functions  
Message  
When  
What to do (See)  
There is no "Pictures" folder.  
Cannot load the image because  
Use the appropriate data and store the data  
Please create /Pictures/ folder “Pictures” folder is not found in the properly. (Page 135)  
and store the appropriate file inserted external storage device.  
images to be uploaded in that  
“Pictures” folder exists on the exter- Use the appropriate data and store the data  
Folder.  
nal storage device (USB, SD) but  
there is no loadable data in the  
folder.  
properly. (Page 135)  
Data Read error.  
The file is corrupt  
Failed to read the data for some rea- Use the appropriate data and store the data  
son. properly. (Page 135)  
The data is damaged or an attempt Use the appropriate data and store the data  
was made to set an image file that properly. (Page 135)  
was not made to specifications as  
the splash screen.  
Connection failed.  
The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-  
less technology is turned off.  
less technology.  
The cellular phone is paired (con-  
nected) with another device.  
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.  
Rejection has been received from  
the cellular phone.  
Operate the target phone and accept the con-  
nection request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
The target cellular phone can not be Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
found.  
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
lar phone is not too far.  
Could not find any available  
phone.  
No available phone exists in the sur- ! Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-  
roundings when the system  
less technology.  
searches for connectable cellular  
! Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
technology. lar phone is not too far.  
Dataloading failed.  
If you transferred the data from your ! Select just a suitable item, format, and then  
cellular phone in a format can not retry. (Page 63)  
be received with navigation system. ! Connect your cellular phone with another  
method again and retry. (Page 52)  
Your mobile phone can not  
support this feature.  
Connected cellular phone has no  
compatibility with the phone book  
transfer function of this navigation  
system.  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book transfer may not be available.  
159  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages for Audio Functions  
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer  
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error  
persists, contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center.  
The messages in “( )” will appear on the “Rear display”.  
Built-in DVD drive (AVIC-F900BTand AVIC-F90BT)  
Message  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Reading error  
Dirty  
Clean disc.  
(ERROR-02-XX)  
Scratched disc  
The disc is loaded upside down  
Electrical or mechanical  
Replace disc.  
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.  
Press RESET button. (Page 11)  
Mechanism error  
Region code error (DIFFERENT The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the  
REGION DISC)  
gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.  
tem.  
NON-PLAYABLE DISC  
This type of disc cannot be played  
by the navigation system  
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-  
tem can play.  
Thermal error (THERMAL PRO- The temperature of the navigation  
TECTION IN MOTION)  
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to  
system is outside of the normal op- within normal operating limits.  
erating range  
Error not defined (ERROR-FF- Undefined error  
Press RESET button. (Page 11)  
FF)  
Non-playable tracks are  
skipped. (FILE SKIPPED)  
Files that are protected by digital  
rights management.  
The protected files are skipped.  
Impossible to play all tracks.  
(PROCETED DISC)  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace disc.  
secured by DRM.  
Flash writing error. Impossible The playback history for VOD con-  
• Try saving again.  
to write on the flash. (CAN  
tents cannot be saved for some rea- • If the message appears frequently, consult  
NOT SAVE DATA)  
son.  
your dealer.  
Authorization Error (AUTHOR- The device does not match the de-  
IZATION ERROR)  
Check whether this device has been regis-  
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.  
der. VOD contents cannot be played  
back.  
File Error NON-PLAYABLE FILE VOD rental contents file error  
• Try saving again.  
• If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
Played back a disc with incompati- Playback a disc with compatible format.  
ble format.  
Press track list to play and  
title will appear.  
The disc that has many files are  
played and all titles cannot be dis-  
played at once.  
Touch the one of listed items to play.  
Built-in CD drive (AVIC-F700BTand AVIC-F7010BT)  
Message  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Clean disc.  
Reading error  
Dirty  
(ERROR-11, 12, 17, 30)  
Scratched disc  
Replace disc.  
160  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Electrical or mechanical  
Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON, or  
switch to a different source, then back to the  
CD player.  
Reading error  
(ERROR-10, 11, 12, 15, 17, 30,  
A0)  
Reading error  
(ERROR-15)  
The inserted disc does not contain Replace disc.  
any data.  
Reading error  
(ERROR-23)  
The CD format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace disc.  
Reading error  
(ERROR-22)  
The inserted disc does not contain Replace disc.  
any files that can be played back  
Non-playable tracks are  
skipped.  
The inserted disc contains files that Replace disc.  
are protected by DRM  
Impossible to play all tracks.  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace disc.  
secured by DRM.  
SD/USB/iPod  
Message  
Cause  
Action (See)  
Non-playable tracks are  
skipped.  
Files that are protected by digital  
rights management.  
The protected files are skipped.  
Impossible to play all tracks.  
(PROCETED DISC)  
All the files on the inserted external Store playable files.  
storage device are secured by DRM.  
An error occurred on USB con- The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB  
nection. USB devices are not  
available to use and iPod  
power supply is also unavail-  
able.  
short-circuited.  
cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do  
consumes more than 500 mA (maxi- not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,  
mum allowable current).  
then to ACC or ON and then connect the  
compliant USB storage device.  
The USB interface cable for iPod is Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or  
short-circuited.  
USB cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
Connected iPod is not sup-  
ported. Please check instruc-  
tion manual.  
The iPod is not compatible with this Use an iPod with a compatible version.  
navigation system.  
iPod connection failed. Please Communication failure  
reconnect.  
• Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod  
main menu is displayed, connect the cable  
again.  
• If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
Data to control iPod by voice iPod function is restricted because • Wait until the information acquisition  
is being created. During this  
the navigation system is trying to  
finishes.  
process, iPod function may be acquire the information needed to  
• Deactivate the information acquisition if de-  
restricted.  
operate iPod with voice commands sired. (Page 144)  
from the iPod currently connected.  
Voice Synching…My voice  
Voice operation is restricted be-  
• Wait until the information acquisition  
system will be busy until I’m  
cause the navigation system is try- finishes.  
finished, but you can use the ing to acquire the information  
• Deactivate the information acquisition if de-  
touch interface  
needed to operate iPod with voice  
commands from the iPod currently  
connected.  
sired. (Page 144)  
161  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Other sources  
Message  
Cause  
Action (See)  
System detected improper  
connection of Parking Brake  
lead. Please check your con-  
figuration for safety. Please  
see Operation Manual for  
more information regarding  
safe operation.  
Parking brake lead is incorrectly  
connected.  
Confirm once more that their connections are  
correct.  
UPDATING  
The selected channel is not in-  
cluded in your subscription.  
Select another channel.  
Radio is being updated with the lat- Wait until the encryption code is fully up-  
est encryption code. dated.  
162  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
The built-in sensor can even calculate  
Positioning technology  
changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-  
pancies in the distance traveled caused by  
driving along winding roads or up slopes.  
If you use AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT with  
connecting the speed pulse, the system will  
become more accurate than no connection of  
speed pulse. So you connect the speed pulse  
without fail to get the accuracy of positioning.  
p The position of the speed detection circuit  
vary depending on the vehicle model. For  
details, consult your authorized Pioneer  
dealer or an installation professional.  
AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT accurately mea-  
sures your current location by combining the  
positioning by GPS and by “Dead Reckoning”.  
AVIC-F700BT and AVIC-F7010BT accurately  
measures your current location by the GPS po-  
sitioning.  
Positioning by GPS  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a  
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each  
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of  
21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-  
nals giving time and position information. This  
ensures that signals from at least three can be  
picked up from any open area on the earth’s  
surface.  
The accuracy of the GPS information depends  
on how good the reception is. When the sig-  
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS  
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude  
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.  
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-  
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained  
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.  
p Some types of vehicles may not output a  
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-  
meters per hour. In such a case, the current  
location of your vehicle may not be dis-  
played correctly while in a traffic conges-  
tion or in a parking lot.  
How do GPS and “Dead  
Reckoning” work together?  
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-  
tem continually compares GPS data with your  
estimated position as calculated from the data  
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data  
from the built-in sensor is available for a long  
period, positioning errors are gradually com-  
pounded until the estimated position becomes  
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-  
nals are available, they are matched with the  
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct  
it for improved accuracy.  
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter  
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors  
may suddenly increase because of differ-  
ence in wheel diameter. In such case,  
pressing RESET button initialize the sensor  
status and it may recover the accuracy to  
normal condition.  
Positioning by “Dead Reckoning”  
The built-in sensor in the navigation system  
also calculates your position. The current loca-  
tion is measured by detecting driving distance  
with the speed pulse, the turning direction  
with the “Gyrosensor” and inclination of the  
road with the “G sensor”.  
163  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Map matching  
When positioning by GPS is  
impossible  
As mentioned, the positioning systems used  
by this navigation system are susceptible to  
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-  
sion, place you in a location on the map where  
no road exists. In this situation, the processing  
system understands that vehicles travel only  
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-  
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map  
matching.  
!
If signals cannot be received from more  
than two GPS satellites, GPS positioning  
does not take place.  
!
In some driving conditions, signals from  
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.  
In this case, it is impossible for the system  
to use GPS positioning.  
In tunnels or en-  
closed parking  
garages  
Under elevated  
roads or similar  
structures  
With map matching  
When driving  
among high build-  
ings  
When driving through  
a dense forest or tall  
trees  
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used  
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may  
be lost temporarily.  
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or car wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals, so keep the  
antenna clear.  
Without map matching  
Handling large errors  
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by  
combining GPS, “Dead Reckoning” and map  
matching. However, in some situations, these  
functions may not work properly, and the error  
may become bigger.  
p If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be re-  
ceived, learning and error correction are  
not possible. If GPS positioning has been  
operating for only a short time, your vehi-  
cle’s actual position and the current loca-  
tion mark on the map may diverge  
considerably. Once GPS reception is re-  
stored, accuracy will be recovered.  
164  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
If you drive in zigzags.  
Conditions likely to cause  
noticeable positioning errors  
For various reasons, such as the state of the  
road you are traveling on and the reception  
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of  
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-  
played on the map screen.  
If the road has connected hairpin bends.  
!
!
If you make a shallow turn.  
If there is a parallel road.  
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-  
tion.  
!
!
If there is another road very nearby, such  
as in the case of an elevated freeway.  
!
!
If you take a ferry.  
If you take a recently opened road that is  
not on the map.  
If you are driving on a long, straight road or  
a gently curving road.  
165  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with  
many height changes.  
!
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS  
signals for a considerable period.  
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-  
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.  
!
!
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot  
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.  
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-  
milar structure.  
!
If you join the road after driving around a  
large parking lot.  
!
!
When you pass around a traffic circle.  
!
If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a  
gravel road or in snow.  
When starting driving immediately after  
starting the engine.  
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires  
for ones with a different size.  
Route setting information  
Route search specifications  
Your navigation system sets a route to your  
destination by applying certain built-in rules to  
the map data. This section provides some use-  
ful information about how a route is set.  
166  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
When there is a traffic congestion ahead, if  
CAUTION  
driving through the traffic congestion is  
better than taking the detour, a detour  
route may not be suggested.  
There may be instances when the starting  
point, the waypoint and the destination  
point are not on the highlighted route.  
The number of traffic circle exits displayed  
on the screen may differ from the actual  
number of roads.  
When a route is calculated, the route and voice  
guidance for the route are automatically set.  
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-  
mation about traffic regulations at the time when  
the route was calculated is shown. One-way  
streets and street closures may not be taken into  
consideration. For example, if a street is open dur-  
ing the morning only, but you arrive later, it would  
be against the traffic regulations so you cannot  
drive along the set route. When driving, please  
follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system  
may not know some traffic regulations.  
!
!
Route highlighting  
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright  
color on the map.  
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting  
point and destination may not be high-  
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-  
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,  
the route may appear to be cut off on the  
display, but voice guidance will continue.  
!
The calculated route is one example of the  
route to your destination decided by the na-  
vigation system while taking the type of  
streets or traffic regulations into account. It  
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In  
some cases, you may not be able to set the  
streets you want to pass. If you need to  
pass a certain street, set the waypoint on  
that street.)  
Supplemental information about  
directions  
!
!
If the destination is too far, there may be in-  
stances where the route cannot be set. (If  
you want to set a long-distance route going  
across several areas, set waypoints along  
the way.)  
Symbol  
Meanings  
Highway  
Motorway exit left/right  
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-  
tions from the freeway are announced.  
However, if you pass intersections, turns,  
and other guide points in rapid succession,  
some may delay or not be announced.  
It is possible that guidance may direct you  
off a freeway and then back on again.  
In some cases, the route may require you  
to travel in the opposite direction to your  
current heading. In such cases, you are in-  
structed to turn around, so please turn  
around safely by following the actual traffic  
rules.  
Roudabout (clockwise and anti-clock-  
wise)  
Ferry (start and end)  
Car only road (start and end)  
Car train (start and end)  
Other information  
!
!
!
In some cases, a route may begin on the  
opposite side of a railway or river from your  
actual current location. If this happens,  
drive towards your destination for a while,  
and try route calculation again.  
167  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
!
Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-  
onments including under direct sunlight.  
Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-  
micals to the surface of the discs.  
To clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft  
cloth outward from the center.  
Supplemental information about  
traffic icon  
Icon  
Meanings  
Stop-and-go traffic  
Stopped traffic  
Closed/blocked roads  
Accidents, constructions, etc.  
Road works  
!
!
Condensation may temporarily impair the  
built-in drive’s performance. Leave it to ad-  
just to the warmer temperature for about  
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a  
soft cloth.  
Playback of discs may not be possible be-  
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,  
recorded application, playback environ-  
ment, storage conditions and so on.  
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.  
Read the precautions for discs before  
using them.  
Road narrows, lane closures  
Warnings, other dangers  
Bad weather condition  
Police ahead  
!
!
Handling and care of the disc  
Some basic precautions are necessary when  
handling your discs.  
Ambient conditions for playing  
a disc  
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-  
ture cutout protects this product by switch-  
ing it off automatically.  
Built-in drive and care  
!
Use only conventional, fully circular discs.  
Do not use shaped discs.  
!
Despite our careful design of the product,  
small scratches that do not affect actual  
operation may appear on the disc surface  
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient  
conditions for use or handling of the disc.  
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this  
product. Consider it to be normal wear and  
tear.  
!
!
Use 12-cm or 8-cm disc. Do not use an  
adapter when playing 8-cm discs.  
Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or  
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-  
mage the built-in drive.  
!
!
Do not touch the recorded surface of the  
discs.  
Store discs in their cases when not in use.  
168  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-  
Playable discs  
About DVD-Video and CD  
DVD and CD discs that display the logos  
shown below generally can be played on this  
built-in DVD drive.  
blems on this navigation system. In some  
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in  
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To  
prevent this, we recommend you refrain  
from using DualDisc with this navigation  
system.  
DVD-Video  
Please refer to the manufacturer for more  
detailed information about DualDiscs.  
About Dolby Digital  
AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT will down-mix  
Dolby Digital signals internally and the sound  
will be output by the stereo. (Equipped with  
optical output for future extension.)  
p Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
CD  
Laboratories.  
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.  
This DVD drive may not be able to play all  
discs bearing the marks shown above.  
About DTS sound  
Only digital output of DTS sound is possible. If  
this unit’s optical digital outputs cannot be  
used, DTS sound will not be output, so select  
an audio track other than DTS sound.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered tra-  
demarks of DTS, Inc.  
About AVCHD recorded discs  
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded  
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-  
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If  
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.  
About playing DualDisc  
Detailed information for  
playable media  
Compatibility  
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a  
recordable CD for audio on one side and a  
recordable DVD for video on the other.  
Playback of the DVD side is possible with  
this navigation system. However, since the  
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-  
patible with the general CD standard, it  
may not be possible to play the CD side  
with this navigation system.  
!
Common notes about disc compatibility  
!
!
!
Certain functions of this product may not  
be available for some discs.  
Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-  
teed.  
It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/  
DVD-RAM discs.  
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-  
Disc may result in scratches to the disc.  
169  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Playback of discs may become impossible  
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-  
peratures, or depending on the storage  
conditions in the vehicle.  
!
Playback of discs recorded on a personal  
computer may not be possible depending  
on the recording device, writing software,  
their setting and another environment.  
Please record with the correct format. (For  
more details, please contact manufacturer  
of media, recorders, or writing software.)  
Titles and other text information recorded  
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-  
played by this product (in the case of audio  
data (CD-DA)).  
!
!
DVD-Video discs  
!
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-  
gion numbers cannot be played on this  
DVD drive. The region number of the player  
can be found on this product’s chassis.  
!
Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW  
discs before using them.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual  
Layer) discs  
!
Unfinalized discs which have been re-  
corded with the Video format (video mode)  
cannot be played back.  
Discs which have been recorded with the  
Video Recording format (VR mode) can be  
played back. However, unfinalized disc may  
not be played back. Unplayable disc should  
be finalized.  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have  
been recorded with Layer Jump recording  
cannot be played back.  
For more information about recording  
mode, please contact the manufacturer of  
media, recorders, or writing software.  
The following logo indicates that this unit is  
compatible with DVD-RW discs which have  
been recorded with the Video Recording  
format (VR mode).  
Common notes about the external  
storage device (USB, SD)  
!
Depending on the kind of the external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-  
tion system may not recognize the storage  
device or files may not be played back prop-  
erly.  
!
!
!
Do not leave the external storage device  
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-  
peratures.  
The text information of some audio and  
video files may not be correctly displayed.  
File extensions must be used properly.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of files on an external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD) with numerous folder hier-  
archies.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
Operations may vary depending on the  
kind of an external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
USB storage device compatibility  
= For more details about USB storage device  
compatibility with this navigation system,  
refer to Specifications on page 187.  
Protocol: bulk  
CD-R/CD-RW discs  
!
!
Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.  
It may not be possible to play back CD-R/  
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-  
corder or a personal computer because of  
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation  
on the lens of the built-in drive.  
Subclass: SCSI (06h)  
!
You cannot connect a USB storage device  
to this navigation system via a USB hub.  
Partitioned USB memory is not compatible  
with this navigation system.  
!
170  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Firmly secure the USB storage device when  
driving. Do not let the USB storage device  
fall onto the floor, where it may become  
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
Depending on the USB storage devices  
connected to this navigation system, noise  
may be generate on the radio.  
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including  
DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX®  
media files.  
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-  
ing site:  
!
!
!
http://www.divx.com/  
DivX subtitle files  
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension  
“.srt” can be used.  
Only one subtitle file can be used for each  
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be  
associated.  
!
Do not connect anything other than the  
USB portable audio player/USB memory  
device.  
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same  
character string as the DivX file before the  
extension are associated with the DivX file.  
The character strings before the extension  
must be exactly the same. However, if there  
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in  
a single folder, the files are associated even  
if the file names are not the same.  
The subtitle file must be stored in the same  
folder as the DivX file.  
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any  
more subtitle files will not be recognized.  
Up to 64 characters can be used for the  
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-  
tension. If more than 64 characters are  
used for the file name, the subtitle file may  
not be recognized.  
The character code for the subtitle file  
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-  
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the  
characters to be displayed incorrectly.  
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly  
if the displayed characters in the subtitle  
file include control code.  
For materials that use a high transfer rate,  
the subtitles and video may not be comple-  
tely synchronized.  
The sequence of audio files on USB mem-  
ory  
For USB portable audio players, the sequence  
is different from that of USB memory device  
and depends on the player.  
SD memory card and SDHC memory card  
!
!
!
!
For more details about SD memory card  
compatibility with this navigation system,  
refer to Specifications on page 187.  
Handling guidelines and  
supplemental information  
!
There is no compatibility for Multi Media  
Card (MMC).  
Copyright protected files cannot be played  
back.  
!
!
Notes unique to DivX files  
!
!
!
!
Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-  
ner site are guarantee for proper operation.  
Unauthorized DivX file may not operate  
properly.  
DRM rental files cannot be operated until  
playing back is started.  
The navigation system corresponds to a  
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43  
seconds. Search operations beyond this  
time limit are prohibited.  
!
!
If multiple subtitles are programmed to dis-  
play within a very short time frame, such as  
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-  
played at the correct time.  
!
DivX VOD file playback requires supplying  
the ID code of this navigation system to the  
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,  
refer to Displaying your DivX® VOD registra-  
tion code on page 84.  
171  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Media compatibility chart  
General  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet  
and UDF 1.02  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo and Joliet  
File system  
FAT16/FAT32  
Maximum number  
of folders  
FAT32: No limit.  
FAT16: 512 (including files)  
99  
255  
Maximum number  
of files  
FAT32: No limit.  
FAT16: 512 (including folders)  
999  
3 500  
MP3, WMA,  
AAC, WAV  
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI,  
MPEG-4  
Playable file types  
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX  
MP3 compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.mp3  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for empha-  
sis)  
Sampling frequency  
16 kHz to 48 kHz  
ID3 tag  
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3  
ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.3  
Notes:  
!
!
Ver. 2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.  
There is no compatibility with the followings:  
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist  
172  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
WMA compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.wma  
Ver. 9: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR),  
VBR  
Ver. 7 or 8: 128 kbps to 192 kbps  
(CBR), VBR  
48 kbps to  
320 kbps (CBR), 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
VBR  
Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz 8 kHz to 48 kHz  
Note:  
!
There is no compatibility with the followings:  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice  
WAV compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
Format  
.wav  
.wav  
Linear PCM  
(LPCM), MS  
ADPCM  
Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM  
LPCM: 16 kHz to  
48 kHz  
Sampling frequency MS ADPCM:  
22.05 kHz and  
AVIC-F900BT and AVIC-F90BT can-  
not play WAV files on the built-in  
DVD drive.  
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz  
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and  
44.1 kHz  
44.1 kHz  
LPCM: 8 bits  
and 16 bits  
MS ADPCM:  
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits  
IMA-ADPCM: 3 bits and 4 bits  
Quantization bits  
4 bits  
Note:  
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.  
173  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AAC compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.m4a  
16 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)  
11 kHz to  
Sampling frequency  
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz  
44.1 kHz  
Notes:  
!
!
The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes®.  
There is no compatibility with the followings:  
Apple Lossless, files encoded with VBR  
DivX compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
.avi/.divx  
Profile (DivX ver-  
sion)  
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/  
Ver. 5.x/Ver. 6.x  
Compatible audio  
codec  
MP3, Dolby Digital  
AVIC-F700BT  
and AVIC-  
F7010BT cannot  
play DivX files.  
DivX files on the external storage  
device (USB, SD) cannot be played.  
Bit rate (MP3)  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
Sampling frequency  
(MP3)  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz for emphasis)  
Maximum image  
size  
720 × 576 pixels.  
4 GB  
Maximum file size  
Notes:  
!
There is no compatibility with the followings:  
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec  
Depending on the file information composition such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight  
delay in the start of playback on discs.  
!
!
!
!
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback is stopped halfway.  
Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.  
Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and  
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.  
174  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AVI compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
.avi  
Compatible video  
codec  
MPEG-4  
Compatible audio  
codec  
AVI files cannot be played on the built-in drive.  
ADPCM  
Image size: VGA (640 x 480)  
Bit rate: 480 kbps  
Frame rate: 24 fps  
Recommended  
video specifications  
MPEG-4 compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-  
R DL  
AVIC-F900BT,  
AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F700BT,  
AVIC-F7010BT AVIC-F90BT  
CD-R/-RW  
AVIC-F900BT,  
USB storage  
device  
(All models)  
SD memory  
card  
(All models)  
Media  
File extension  
.mp4  
Compatible video  
codec  
MPEG-4  
Compatible audio  
codec  
MPEG-4 files cannot be played on the built-in drive.  
AAC  
Image size: VGA (640 x 480)  
Bit rate: 480 kbps  
Frame rate: 24 fps  
Recommended  
video specifications  
Common notes  
ter, including extension for the file and  
folder name. Depending on the display  
area, the navigation system try to display  
them with changing the font size to smal-  
ler. However, the maximum number of the  
characters that you can display varies ac-  
cording to the width of each character or  
display area.  
!
The navigation system may not operate cor-  
rectly depending on the application used to  
encode WMA files.  
!
Depending on the version of Windows  
Media Player used to encode WMA files,  
album names and other text information  
may not be correctly displayed.  
!
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
There is no compatibility with packet write  
data transfer.  
!
!
Folder selection sequence or other opera-  
tion may be altered depending on the en-  
coding or writing software.  
Regardless of the length of blank section  
between the songs of original recording,  
compressed audio discs play with a short  
pause between songs.  
!
!
This navigation system can recognize 32  
characters beginning with the first charac-  
175  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Example of a hierarchy  
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special  
interest group (SIG) that comprises of Ericsson  
Inc., Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM  
in 1998, and it is currently developed by nearly  
2 000 companies worldwide.  
The following figure is an example of the tier  
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-  
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers  
are assigned and the order to be played back.  
: Folder  
!
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are  
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any  
use of such marks by Pioneer Corporation  
is under license. Other trademarks and  
trade names are those of their respective  
owners.  
: File  
1
2
3
About the SAT RADIO  
READY Logo  
4
5
6
Level 1  
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4  
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the  
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM  
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold  
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-  
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or  
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-  
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be  
connected to this navigation system.  
Notes  
!
!
This product assigns folder numbers. The user  
can not assign folder numbers.  
If there is a folder that does not contain any  
playable file, the folder itself will display in the  
folder list but you cannot check any files in  
the folder. (The blank list will appear.) Also,  
these folders will be skipped without display-  
ing the folder number.  
Note:  
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver  
broadcasting technology to provide listeners  
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear  
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-  
lite radio will create and package over 100  
channels of digital- quality music, news,  
sports, talk and children’s programming.  
“SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all re-  
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite  
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
About Bluetooth  
About HD Radio  
The HD Radio Ready logo is a proprietary tra-  
demark of iBiquity Digital Corp.  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-  
nectivity technology that is developed as a  
cable replacement for mobile phones, hand-  
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-  
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits  
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per  
176  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.  
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,  
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a  
About SD and SDHC logo  
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind  
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-  
cal order. Official DivX® Certified product.  
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including  
DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX®  
media files.  
SD Logo is a trademark.  
p DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos  
are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used  
under license.  
SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
About AAC  
About WMA  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-  
eral applications can be used to encode AAC  
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-  
pending on the application which is used to  
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-  
coded by iTunes® version 4.6.  
The Windows Media™ logo printed on the box  
indicates that this unit can play back WMA  
data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio  
and refers to an audio compression technol-  
ogy that is developed by Microsoft  
p iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by  
using Windows Media Player version 7 or  
later. Windows Media and the Windows logo  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
Detailed information  
regarding connectable iPods  
CAUTION  
!
!
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost  
on the iPod even if that data is lost while  
using the navigation system.  
Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-  
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure  
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-  
tion due to the resulting high temperature.  
Do not leave the iPod in any location with  
high temperatures.  
Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not  
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-  
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
About DivX  
!
!
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-  
ated by the DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc.  
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on  
For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.  
177  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of disturbances such as  
spots or colored stripes.  
Using the LCD screen correctly  
Handling the LCD screen  
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-  
come very hot, resulting in possible da-  
mage to the LCD screen. When not using  
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to  
direct sunlight as much as possible.  
The LCD screen should be used within the  
temperature ranges shown in “Specifica-  
tions”.  
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures  
higher or lower than the operating tem-  
perature range because the LCD screen  
may not operate normally and the LCD  
screen can be damaged.  
Maintaining the LCD screen  
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen  
or cleaning it, first turn the system power  
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.  
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not  
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or  
abrasive chemical cleaners.  
!
!
!
Small fluorescent tube  
!
A small fluorescent tube is used inside the  
display to illuminate the LCD screen.  
— The fluorescent tube should last for ap-  
proximately 10 000 hours, depending on  
operating conditions. (Using the naviga-  
tion unit at low temperatures reduces  
the service life of the fluorescent tube.)  
— When the fluorescent tube reaches the  
end of its useful life, the LCD screen will  
become dark and images will no longer  
be projected. If this happens, consult  
your dealer or the nearest authorized  
Pioneer service station.  
!
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-  
crease its visibility within the vehicle.  
Please do not press strongly on it as this  
may damage it.  
!
!
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive  
force as this may scratch it.  
Never touch the LCD screen with anything  
besides your finger when operating the  
Touch Panel functions. The LCD screen can  
scratch easily. (The stylus is supplied for  
special calibrations. Do not use the stylus  
for normal operation.)  
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen  
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air  
conditioner, make sure that air from the air  
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from  
the heater may break the LCD screen, and  
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-  
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-  
sulting in possible damage.  
!
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)  
may appear on the LCD screen. These are  
due to the characteristics of the LCD  
screen and do not indicate a problem with  
the LCD screen.  
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is  
exposed to direct sunlight.  
178  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Display information  
Destination Menu  
Phone Menu  
Page  
Page  
[Address]  
25  
[Dial Pad]  
57  
[POI]  
[Call Home]  
58  
59  
60  
57  
57  
57  
59  
[Around Current GPS Location]  
[Around Destination]  
[Around Cursor]  
[Along Route]  
[Saved Criteria]  
[Register Search Criteria]  
[Favorites]  
28  
28  
27  
28  
30  
29  
33  
33  
31  
34  
45  
34  
[GOOG-411]  
[Phone Volume]  
[Received Calls]  
[Dialed Numbers]  
[Missed Calls]  
[Phone Book Transfer]  
[Phone Settings]  
[Connection]  
[History]  
55  
61  
61  
61  
62  
62  
62  
60  
64  
[USB/SD]  
[Bluetooth On/Off]  
[Return Home]  
[Delete Route]  
[Save Route]  
[Auto Answer Preference]  
[Refuse All Calls]  
[Echo Cancel]  
[Route Function]  
[Route info]  
[Auto Connect]  
41  
42  
44  
44  
32  
46  
[Edit Name]  
[Itinerary]  
[Clear Memory]  
[Edit Route]  
[Bluetooth Software Update]  
[Saved Routes]  
[Coordinate]  
[MSN Direct]  
179  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Settings Menu  
Navi Settings  
[Demo Mode]  
[Sound settings]  
[About]  
129  
130  
130  
Page  
123  
[GPS & Time Settings]  
[Time Settings]  
[Visual]  
124  
[3D Settings]  
125  
125  
126  
126  
127  
130  
132  
127  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
128  
129  
129  
129  
134  
[Map Settings]  
[Displayed Info]  
[Smart Zoom]  
[Overview Mode]  
[Manage POI]  
[Manage Track Logs]  
[Route]  
[Method:]  
[U-turn penalty:]  
[Unpaved Roads]  
[Highways]  
[Ferries]  
[U-turns]  
[Permit Needed]  
[Toll Roads]  
[Warnings]  
[Warn When Speeding]  
[Regional Settings]  
[Restore Factory Settings]  
[Set Home]  
180  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
System Settings menu  
AV Settings menu  
Page  
135  
135  
136  
137  
137  
137  
138  
138  
Page  
143  
143  
143  
143  
144  
144  
144  
[Language]  
[AV1 Input]  
[Splash Screen]  
[Back Camera]  
[AV2 Input]  
[Ant CTRL]  
[Screen Calibration]  
[Picture Adjustment]  
[Illumi Color]  
[Wide Mode]  
[MUTE Input/GUIDE]  
[Rear SP]  
[Service Information]  
[Screen Off]  
[VR Catalog Mode]  
181  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AV Sound menu  
Shortcut menu  
Map Confirmation Screen  
Page  
139  
139  
141  
141  
142  
142  
142  
[FAD/BAL] ([Balance])  
[EQ]  
Page  
[Map]  
35  
[Loudness]  
[Sub Woofer]  
[HPF]  
[Save as...]  
[Add Pin]  
37  
38  
39  
40  
36  
37  
37  
37  
37  
38  
[Add POI]  
[Add Favorite]  
[Route...]  
[SLA]  
[Bass Booster]  
[Go Here Now]  
[Add Via]  
[Continue]  
[Starting Point]  
[Info]  
182  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
DVD Setup  
Page  
[Language]  
[Assist Subtitle]  
[Multi Angle]  
[TV Aspect]  
[Parental]  
82  
82  
83  
83  
83  
84  
84  
85  
[DivX VOD]  
[Auto Play]  
[Subtitle File]  
183  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
DivX  
Glossary  
DivX is a popular media technology created by  
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-  
pressed video with high visual quality that  
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files  
can also include advanced media features like  
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.  
Many DivX media files are available for down-  
load online, and you can create your own  
using your personal content and easy-to-use  
tools from DivX.com.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.  
Aspect ratio  
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.  
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of  
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional  
presence and atmosphere.  
DivX Certified  
DivX Certified products are officially tested by  
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all  
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.  
Bit rate  
This expresses data volume per second, or bps  
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,  
the more information is available to reproduce  
the sound. Using the same encoding method  
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better  
the sound.  
Favorites  
A frequently visited location (such as your  
workplace or a relative’s home) that you can  
register to allow easy routing.  
Built-in sensor  
The built-in sensor that enables the system to  
estimate your vehicle’s position.  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-  
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-  
ety of purposes.  
CD-DA  
This stands for a general music CD (commer-  
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this  
word is sometime used for a distinction be-  
tween data CD (includes the compressed  
audio file) and the general music CD.  
Guidance mode  
The mode in which guidance is given as you  
drive to your destination; the system automati-  
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route  
has been set.  
Chapter  
Guidance point  
Titles of DVD-Video or DVD-VR are in turn di-  
vided into chapters which are numbered in  
the same way as the chapters of a book. With  
discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find  
a desired scene with chapter search.  
These are important landmarks along your  
route, generally intersections. The next gui-  
dance point along your route is indicated on  
the map by the yellow flag icon.  
Home location  
Your registered home location.  
Current location  
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-  
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-  
angle mark.  
Destination  
A location you choose as the end point of your  
journey.  
184  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
ID3 tag  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
JPEG  
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts  
Group, and is an international still image com-  
pression standard.  
This is a method of embedding track-related  
information in a MP3 file. This embedded in-  
formation can include the track title, the ar-  
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,  
the year of production, comments and other  
data. The contents can be freely edited using  
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.  
Although the tags are restricted by the num-  
ber of characters, the information can be  
viewed when the track is played back.  
MP3  
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an  
audio compression standard established by a  
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-  
tional Standards Organization). MP3 is able to  
compress audio data to about 1/10th the size  
of a conventional disc.  
ISO9660 format  
This is the international standard for the for-  
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.  
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations  
for the following two levels:  
MPEG  
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts  
Group, and is an international video image  
compression standard.  
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-  
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English  
capital letters, half-byte numerals and the “_”  
sign, with a file-extension of three characters).  
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-  
cluding the separation mark “.” and a file ex-  
tension). Each folder contains less than 8  
hierarchies.  
Multi-angle  
With regular TV programs, although multiple  
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot  
scenes, only images from one camera at a  
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs  
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-  
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.  
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)  
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-  
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple  
tracks. For example, dialog in up to 8 lan-  
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-  
deo, letting you choose the language as  
desired.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
!
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name  
consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte  
English capital letters, half-byte numerals  
and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of  
three characters).  
Multi-session  
Multi-session is a recording method that al-  
lows additional data to be recorded later.  
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or  
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is  
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-  
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-  
sions in one disc.  
!
!
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters  
(including the separation mark “.” and a file  
extension). Each folder contains less than 8  
hierarchies.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
Multi-subtitle  
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages  
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting  
you choose as desired.  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
185  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Packet write  
contains three separate movies, they are di-  
vided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you  
enjoy the convenience of title search and  
other functions.  
This is a general term for a method of writing  
on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file,  
just as is done with files on floppy or hard  
disks.  
Track log  
Parental lock  
Your navigation system logs your course that  
you already pass through if the track logger is  
activated. This recorded course is called “track  
log”. It is handy when you want to check a  
route traveled or if returning along a complex  
route.  
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-  
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-  
vents children from viewing such scenes. With  
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental  
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for  
children will be disabled, or these scenes will  
be skipped.  
VBR  
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally  
speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more  
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit  
rate according to the needs of audio compres-  
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-  
priority sound quality.  
Phone book  
An address book on user’s phone is collec-  
tively referred to as “Phone book”. Depending  
on the cellular phone, “Phone book” may be  
called a name such as “Contacts”, “Business  
card” or something else.  
Voice guidance  
Point of Interest (POI)  
The giving of directions by navigation voice  
while in guidance.  
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations  
stored in the data, such as railway stations,  
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.  
Waypoint  
A location that you choose to visit before your  
destination; a journey can be built up from  
multiple way points and the destination.  
Region number  
DVD players and DVD discs feature region  
numbers indicating the area in which they  
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-  
sible unless it features the same region num-  
ber as the DVD player.  
WMA  
WMA is short for Windows Media™ Audio  
and refers to an audio compression technol-  
ogy that is developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
Route setting  
The process of determining the ideal route to a  
specific location; route setting is done auto-  
matically by the system when you specify a  
destination.  
Set route  
The route marked out by the system to your  
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on  
the map.  
Title  
DVD-Video or DVD-VR discs have a high data  
capacity, enabling recording of multiple mo-  
vies on a single disc. If, for example, one disc  
186  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Power off ............................ –4 °F to +176 °F  
Specifications  
Audio  
General  
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4  
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×  
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC  
(allowable voltage range:  
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)  
Grounding system ................... Negative type  
Max. current consumption  
........................................... 10.0 A  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
Chassis ............................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×  
157 mm  
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)  
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,  
5 %THD, 4 W LOAD, Both  
Channels Driven)  
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]  
allowable)  
Preout output level (max):  
AVIC-F90BT ....................... 4.0 V  
AVIC-F900BT, AVIC-F700BT, AVIC-F7010BT  
........................................... 2.2 V  
Preout impedance:  
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/8 in.)  
Nose ..................................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 8 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×  
3/8 in.)  
AVIC-F90BT ....................... 100 ohm  
AVIC-F900BT, AVIC-F700BT, AVIC-F7010BT  
........................................... 1 kohm  
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):  
Low  
Weight:  
AVIC-F900BT, AVIC-F90BT  
........................................... 2.2 kg (4.9 lbs)  
AVIC-F700BT, AVIC-F7010BT  
........................................... 2.1 kg (4.6 lbs)  
NAND flash memory ............. 2 GB  
Frequency ................ 40 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/160 Hz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Navigation  
GPS Receiver:  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
Mid  
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS  
SPS (Standard Positioning  
Service)  
Reception system .......... 30-channel multi-channel  
reception system  
Frequency ................ 200 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz/2 kHz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
High  
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz  
Sensitivity .......................... –140 dBm (typ)  
Position update frequency  
........................................... Approx. once per second  
GPS antenna:  
Frequency ................ 3.15 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz/  
12.5 kHz  
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB  
when boosted)  
Gain ............................ 12 dB  
Loudness contour:  
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/  
right-handed helical polari-  
sation  
Antenna cable ................. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
........................................... 33 mm × 15 mm × 36 mm  
(1-1/4 in. × 5/8 in. ×  
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB  
(10 kHz)  
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB  
(10 kHz)  
1-3/8 in.)  
(volume: –30 dB)  
Weight ................................ 96 g (0.2 lbs)  
HPF:  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct  
Subwoofer:  
Display  
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 5.8 inch wide/16:9  
(effective display area:  
128 mm × 72 mm)  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct  
Gain ...................................... –24/+6 dB  
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse  
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)  
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving  
Color system .............................. NTSC/PAL compatible  
Durable temperature range:  
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F  
187  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Bass boost:  
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
USB class .................................... Mass storage class  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
MPEG4  
DVD drive (AVIC-F900BTand AVIC-F90BT)  
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,  
AAC, DivX system  
SD  
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,  
AAC, DivX  
Region number ........................ 1  
Signal format:  
Compatible physical format  
..................................................... Version 2.00  
Max capacity memory ........... 8 GB  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
MPEG4  
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz  
Number of quantization bits  
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear  
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,  
at sampling frequency  
Bluetooth  
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 1.2 certified  
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.  
(Power class 2)  
96 kHz)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-  
work)  
FM tuner  
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A  
network))  
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB  
(1 kHz))  
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 dBf (0.7 µV/75 W, mono,  
S/N: 30 dB)  
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)  
Output level:  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 75 dB (IHF-A network)  
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
stereo)  
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
mono)  
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)  
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)  
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)  
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)  
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded  
by iTunes):  
AM tuner  
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz)  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 18 µV (S/N: 20 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 65 dB (IHF-A network)  
.m4a  
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,  
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :  
.avi, .divx  
CD drive (AVIC-F700BTand AVIC-F7010BT)  
System .......................................... CD, MP3, WMA, AAC sys-  
tem  
CEA2006 Specifications  
Usable discs .............................. CD, MP3, WMA, AAC  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 94 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-  
work)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.7,7.1,8,9,10 (2 ch audio)  
(Windows Media Player)  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes en-  
coded only)  
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels  
(4 W and ≦ 1 % THD+N)  
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into  
4 W)  
WAVE SIGNAL FORMAT ...... Linear-PCM, MS ADPCM  
(Non Compressed)  
Note  
USB  
Specifications and design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice due to im-  
provements.  
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed  
Max current supply ................. 500 mA  
Max capacity memory ........... 2 GB  
188  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU  
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium  
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936  
TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia  
TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada  
TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
TEL: 905-479-4411  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso  
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000  
TEL:55-9178-4270  
先鋒股份有限公司  
總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓  
電話 : (02) 2521-3588  
先鋒電子（香港）有限公司  
香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室  
電話 : (0852) 2848-6488  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2008 by Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<KKYZX> <08F00000>  
<CRB2808-A> UC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pelco DVR C1607M 6 04 User Manual
Philips Portable DVD Player PET1031 93 User Manual
Philips Speaker System MC i250 User Manual
Philips Work Light TL E User Manual
Planar Laser Pointer MP 3450 User Manual
Polaroid Digital Camera PDC 3030 User Manual
Polk Audio Speaker 6600 User Manual
Porter Cable Nail Gun 894884 003 User Manual
Porter Cable Saw FTS 150 User Manual
ProForm Music Mixer PMTL327060 User Manual